manualshive.com logo in svg

GE D60, Инструкция по эксплуатации

Операторский бизнес и инструкций по эксплуатации RAMSET D60 доступны для загрузки бесплатно на сайте. Этот ручной инструмент был разработан для обеспечения безопасного и эффективного использования. Скачайте руководство с сайта {ваш сайт} и ознакомьтесь с инструкциями по эксплуатации.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

8-24

D60 Line Distance Protection System

GE Multilin

8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

8

8.5.2 PHASE SELECTION

The D60 uses phase relations between current symmetrical components for phase selection. First, the algorithm validates
if there is enough zero-sequence, positive-sequence, and negative-sequence currents for reliable analysis. The compari-
son is adaptive; that is, the magnitudes of the three symmetrical components used mutually as restraints confirm if a given
component is large enough to be used for phase selection. Once the current magnitudes are validated, the algorithm ana-
lyzes phase relations between the negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents and negative-sequence and zero-
sequence currents (when applicable) as illustrated below.

Figure 8–10: PHASE SELECTION PRINCIPLE (ABC PHASE ROTATION)

Due to dual comparisons, the algorithm is very secure. For increased accuracy and to facilitate operation in weak systems,
the pre-fault components are removed from the analyzed currents. The algorithm is very fast and ensures proper phase
selection before any of the correctly set protection elements operates.

Under unusual circumstances such as weak-infeed conditions with the zero-sequence current dominating during any
ground fault, or during cross-country faults, the current-based phase selector may not recognize any of the known fault pat-
tern. If this is the case, voltages are used for phase selection. The voltage algorithm is the same as the current-based algo-
rithm; for example, phase angles between the zero-sequence, negative-sequence, and positive-sequence voltages are
used. The pre-fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations.

The pre-fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the disturbance detector (50DD) operates. When an
open pole is declared, the phase selector resets all its outputs operands and ignores any subsequent operations of the dis-
turbance detector.

The phase selector runs continuously. When there is no disturbance in the power system, and the disturbance detector
(50DD) from the source assigned as the 

DISTANCE SOURCE

 is reset, then the 

PHASE SELECT VOID

 FlexLogic operand is set

and all other phase selector operands are reset. All current and voltage sequence components are memorized and contin-
uously updated.

When the disturbance detector (50DD) operates, memory stops being updated and retains two cycles of old current and
voltage values. First, purely fault components of current and voltage are calculated by removing the pre-fault (memory)
quantities from presently calculated values. A series of conditions are checked with respect to magnitudes and phase
angles of current and voltage symmetrical components in order to detect the fault type. Secondly, currents are used to iden-
tify the fault type (AG, BG, CG, AB, BC, CA, ABG, BCG or CAG) according to the 

Phase selection principle

 figure above. If

the currents fail to identify the fault type, and voltages are available, then voltages are used. If any of the above types is
determined, then the corresponding FlexLogic operand below is asserted.

837725A1.CDR

AB,
ABG

CA,
CAG

BC,
BCG

AG

AG,
BCG

I

2F

I

2F

I

1F

I

0F

BG

CG,
ABG

CG

BG,
CAG

Содержание D60

Страница 1: ...GEK 119557A GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEDigitalEnergy com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO 9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0089 AA2 GE Digital Energy LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 ...

Страница 2: ... Digital Energy Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part number ...

Страница 3: ...VIGATION 1 18 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY 1 18 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 19 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 19 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 19 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 20 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 SECURITY 2 3 2 1 3 IEC 870 5 103 PROTOCOL 2 7 2 2 ORDER CODES 2 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 8 2 2 2 ORDER CODES WITH ENHANCED CT VT MODULES 2 8 2 2 3 ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES 2 11 2 ...

Страница 4: ...NERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW 4 4 4 2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 2 1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES 4 5 4 2 2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS 4 9 4 2 3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY 4 11 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 3 1 FACEPLATE 4 14 4 3 2 LED INDICATORS 4 15 4 3 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS 4 18 4 3 4 DISPLAY 4 24 4 3 5 KEYPAD 4 24 4 3 6 BREAKER CONTROL 4 25 4 3 7 MENUS 4 26 4 3 8 CHANGING SETTI...

Страница 5: ...NT 5 201 5 6 8 NEUTRAL CURRENT 5 211 5 6 9 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 5 219 5 6 10 GROUND CURRENT 5 223 5 6 11 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT 5 225 5 6 12 BREAKER FAILURE 5 232 5 6 13 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 241 5 6 14 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 5 252 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 7 1 OVERVIEW 5 255 5 7 2 TRIP BUS 5 255 5 7 3 SETTING GROUPS 5 257 5 7 4 SELECTOR SWITCH 5 259 5 7 5 TRIP OUTPUT 5 265 5 7 6 UNDERFREQUEN...

Страница 6: ... 2 13 ETHERNET 6 8 6 2 14 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING 6 8 6 2 15 DIRECT INPUTS 6 9 6 2 16 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS 6 10 6 2 17 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS 6 10 6 2 18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS 6 10 6 2 19 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS 6 11 6 2 20 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP 6 11 6 3 METERING 6 3 1 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 13 6 3 2 SOURCES 6 16 6 3 3 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 6 20 6 3 4 SYNCHROCH...

Страница 7: ...NGLE POLE TRIPPING 8 5 1 OVERVIEW 8 21 8 5 2 PHASE SELECTION 8 24 8 5 3 COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS FOR PILOT AIDED SCHEMES 8 26 8 5 4 PERMISSIVE ECHO SIGNALING 8 33 8 5 5 PILOT SCHEME PHASE SELECTOR COORDINATION 8 34 8 5 6 CROSS COUNTRY FAULT EXAMPLE 8 35 8 6 FAULT LOCATOR 8 6 1 FAULT TYPE DETERMINATION 8 36 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9 1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES 9 1 1 INTRODUCTION 9 1 9 1 2 IMPACT OF M...

Страница 8: ...ERATION FUNCTION CODE 05H B 5 B 2 4 STORE SINGLE SETTING FUNCTION CODE 06H B 5 B 2 5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS FUNCTION CODE 10H B 6 B 2 6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES B 6 B 3 FILE TRANSFERS B 3 1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS B 7 B 4 MEMORY MAPPING B 4 1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP B 9 B 4 2 DATA FORMATS B 86 C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS C 1 OVERVIEW C 1 1 INTRODUCTION C 1 C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES C 1 C 2 SERVER...

Страница 9: ...EMENT C 22 C 6 2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 22 C 6 3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 23 C 7 LOGICAL NODES C 7 1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE C 26 D IEC 60870 5 103 COMMUNICATIONS D 1 IEC 60870 5 103 D 1 1 OVERVIEW D 1 D 1 2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND D 1 D 1 3 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT D 2 E IEC 60870 5 104 COMMS E 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL E 1 1 INTEROPERABILITY DO...

Страница 10: ...x D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS H 3 WARRANTY H 3 1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY H 8 INDEX ...

Страница 11: ...ed limits Only qualified personnel are to operate the device Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country regional utility and plant safety regulations Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers voltage transformers control and test circuit terminals Make sure ...

Страница 12: ...ION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 TELEPHONE Worldwide 1 905 927 7070 Europe Middle East Africa 34 94 485 88 54 North America toll free 1 800 547 8629 FAX 1 905 927 5098 E MAIL Worldwide multilin tech ge com Europe multilin tech euro ge com HOME PAGE http www gedigitalenergy com multilin For updates to the instruction manual...

Страница 13: ...TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard wired contacts Both wet and dry contacts are supported The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR series internal logic signals Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device...

Страница 14: ... the use of objects and classes An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates data A class is the generalized form of similar objects By using this approach one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class such as time overcurrent instantaneous overcurrent current differential undervoltage overvoltage underfrequency...

Страница 15: ...a DVD drive The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the D60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met install the software from the GE EnerVista DVD Or download...

Страница 16: ...on The UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown Figure 1 5 UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE D60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW You connect remotely to the D60 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software The D60 can also be accessed locally w...

Страница 17: ...button then select the new site to re open the Device Setup window 6 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 7 Enter a name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 8 Select Serial from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for serial communications Figure 1 6 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9 Enter th...

Страница 18: ... Setup window 16 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 17 Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 18 Select Ethernet from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality Figure 1 7 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 19 Enter the relay IP address specifie...

Страница 19: ...ed click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communi cations to the D60 device This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the D60 model number b USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the D60 from a computer through Ethernet first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard 1 Press the ...

Страница 20: ...Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list and click the Properties button 4 Click the Use the following IP address box ...

Страница 21: ...r time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration 5 If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 1 1 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip time in milliseconds Minimum 0ms Maximum ...

Страница 22: ...onnection specific DNS suffix IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS suffix IP Address 1 1 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway C WINNT Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer 1 Start the Internet Explorer software 2 Select the Tool...

Страница 23: ...m the Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown If this computer is used to connect...

Страница 24: ...gs can now be edited printed or changed See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are often performed when using D60 relays From the online window users can select...

Страница 25: ...authentication can be chosen on the login screen but the choice is available only in EnerVista Use device authentication to log in using the five pre configured roles Administrator Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer When using a serial connection only device authentication is supported When server authentication is required characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configur...

Страница 26: ...using EnerVista navigate to Settings Product Setup Security Change the Local Administrator Password for example It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default Changing the passwords for the other three roles is optional Figure 1 10 CHANGING THE DEFAULT PASSWORD ...

Страница 27: ... serial cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the D60 rear communications port The converter terminals GND are connected to the D60 communication module COM terminals See the CPU Communica tion Ports section in chapter 3 for details The line is terminated with an R C network that is 120 1 nF as described in the chapter 3 1 4 3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages a...

Страница 28: ...7 then then 0 then then 0 then then 1 To save the address press the ENTER key 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings Commands Targets User displays when enabled 1 5 3 MEN...

Страница 29: ...d assigned to specific personnel There are two user security access levels COMMAND and SETTING 1 COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations Operate breakers via faceplate keypad Change state of virtual inputs Clear event records Clear oscillography records Operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETT...

Страница 30: ...dications 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog inputs injection test and metering accuracy verification Calibrated test equipment is required 3 Protection elements setting verification ana...

Страница 31: ...p to 64 records with programmable trigger content and sampling rate and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels with programmable content and sampling rate The internal clock used for time tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG B signal using the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP over the Ethernet port or using the Precision Time Protocol PTP This precise time stamping allows the sequence o...

Страница 32: ...t disturbance detector 59_2 Negative sequence overvoltage 50G Ground instantaneous overcurrent 67N Neutral directional overcurrent 50N Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 67P Phase directional overcurrent 50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent 67_2 Negative sequence directional overcurrent 50_2 Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 68 Power swing blocking 51G Ground time overcurrent 78 Out of ste...

Страница 33: ...WORD SECURITY Password security is a basic security feature present in the default offering of the product Two levels of password security are provided command and setting The following operations are under command password supervision Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad Changing the state of virtual inputs Clearing the event records Clearing the oscillography records Clearing fault report...

Страница 34: ...ged enables user attribution provides accounting of all user activities and uses secure standards based strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection A Role Based Access Control RBAC system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device oper ations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA server that is Admin...

Страница 35: ...ware or UR device nor are they ever transmitted without cryptographic protection CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES CyberSentry user roles Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer limit the levels of access to various UR device functions This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user s logged in role Example Observer cannot write any settings The table l...

Страница 36: ...t Inputs RW RW R R R Direct Outputs RW RW R R R Teleprotection RW RW R R R Direct Analogs RW RW R R R Direct Integers RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Analogs RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Integers RW RW R R R Transducer I O RW RW R R R Testing RW RW R R R Front Panel Labels Designer NA NA NA NA NA Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA Commands RW RW RW R R Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R Clear Records RW RW RW R ...

Страница 37: ...work server authentication requests are denied In this sit uation use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system 2 1 3 IEC 870 5 103 PROTOCOL IEC 870 5 103 is a companion standard to IEC 870 5 suit of standards for transmission protocols It defines messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a substation for communi cating on ...

Страница 38: ...alf B9 IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit PMU and Breaker and a half C0 Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP C2 PRP and Breaker and a half C3 PRP and IEC 61850 C5 PRP IEC 61850 and Breaker and a half C6 PRP and PMU C7 PRP IEC 61850 and PMU C8 PRP Breaker and a half and PMU C9 PRP IEC 61850 Breaker and a half and PMU D0 IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 D2 IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1...

Страница 39: ...ts 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 digital inputs 6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6M 6M 6M 6M...

Страница 40: ...er and a half and PMU F0 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl 1 F2 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Breaker and a half F3 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 F5 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and Breaker and a half F6 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and PMU F7 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU F8 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Breaker and a half and PMU F9 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 Breaker and a half and PMU G0 IEEE 1588 P...

Страница 41: ...hannel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 1 Channel 77 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 2 Channels 7A 820 nm multimode LED 1 Channel 7B 1300 nm multimode LED 1 Channel 7C 1300 nm single mode ELED 1 Channel 7D 1300 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 7E Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 820 nm multimode 7F Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm multimode 7...

Страница 42: ...y J Enhanced front panel with German display and user programmable pushbuttons POWER SUPPLY redundant supply must be same type as main supply H 125 250 V AC DC power supply H RH 125 250 V AC DC with redundant 125 250 V AC DC power supply L 24 to 48 V DC only power supply L RL 24 to 48 V DC only with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply PROCESS BUS MODULE 81 Eight port digital process bus module DI...

Страница 43: ... F5 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and Breaker and a half F6 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and PMU F7 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU F8 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Breaker and a half and PMU F9 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 Breaker and a half and PMU G0 IEEE 1588 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl 1 G2 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Breaker and a half G3 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 G5 IEEE 1...

Страница 44: ...ode Laser 2J Channel 1 IEEE C37 94 MM 64 128 kbps Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 72 1550 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 73 1550 nm single mode Laser 2 Channel 74 Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 1 Channel 77 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 2 Channels 7A 820 nm multimo...

Страница 45: ...gle mode Laser 7Q Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm single mode Laser 7R G 703 1 Channel 7S G 703 2 Channels 7T RS422 1 Channel 7W RS422 2 Channels TRANSDUCER INPUTS OUTPUTS 5A 4 DCmA inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5A module is allowed 5C 8 RTD inputs 5D 4 RTD inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5D module is allowed 5E 4 DCmA inputs 4 RTD inputs 5F 8 DCmA inputs Table 2 9 ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MO...

Страница 46: ... mode Laser 1 Channel 7E Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 820 nm multimode 7F Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm multimode 7G Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm single mode ELED 7H 820 nm multimode LED 2 Channels 7I 1300 nm multimode LED 2 Channels 7J 1300 nm single mode ELED 2 Channels 7K 1300 nm single mode Laser 2 Channels 7L Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 820 nm multimode LED 7M Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 13...

Страница 47: ...aracteristic angle 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Comparator limit angle 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Directional supervision Characteristic angle 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Limit angle 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Right blinder Quad only Reach 0 02 to 500 in steps of 0 01 Characteristic angle 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Left Blinder Quad only Reach 0 02 to 500 in steps of 0 01 Characteristic angle 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Time...

Страница 48: ...050 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout 97 to 98 Memory duration 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 Voltage supervision pickup series compensation applications 0 to 5 000 pu in steps of 0 001 GROUND DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total response time for a particular ap...

Страница 49: ... 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Operate time 20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 1 4 cycle whichever is greater PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Relay connection 90 quadrature Quadrature voltage ABC phase seq phase A VBC phase B VCA phase C VAB ACB phase seq phase A VCB phase B VAC phase C VBA Polarizing voltage threshold 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Current sensiti...

Страница 50: ...ps of 0 01 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 20 ms which ever is greater Operate time 2 cycles at 1 10 pickup NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE Pickup level 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 definite time or user defined curve Reset delay 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Curve timi...

Страница 51: ...vel accuracy 0 5 or 0 1 of rated whichever is greater Pickup delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 42 ms which ever is greater Operate time 42 ms at 1 10 pickup at 60 Hz BREAKER RESTRIKE Principle detection of high frequency overcurrent condition cycle after breaker opens Availability one per CT VT module not including 8Z modules Pickup level 0 1 to 2 00 pu in s...

Страница 52: ... Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization keypad programmable Lines of code 512 Internal variables 64 Supported operations NOT XOR OR 2 to 16 inputs AND 2 to 16 inputs NOR 2 to 16 inputs NAND 2 to 16 inputs latch reset domi nant edge detectors timers Inputs any logical variable contact or virtual input Number of timers 32 Pickup delay 0 to 60000 ms sec min in steps of 1 Dropout delay 0...

Страница 53: ...f 0 001 Timing accuracy 3 or 4 ms whichever is greater 2 3 3 MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Maximum records 64 Sampling rate 64 samples per power cycle Triggers any element pickup dropout or operate contact input change of state contact output change of state FlexLogic equa tion Data AC input channels element state con tact input state contact output state Data storage in non volatile memory EVENT RECOR...

Страница 54: ...VOLTAGE Accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V REAL POWER WATTS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 1 0 PF 0 8 and 0 8 PF 10 REACTIVE POWER VARS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 0 2 PF 0 2 APPARENT POWER VA Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading WATT HOURS POSITIVE AND...

Страница 55: ... modulation 1 to 10 V pk pk DC shift TTL Compatible Input impedance 50 k Isolation 2 kV REMOTE INPUTS IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Input points 32 configured from 64 incoming bit pairs Remote devices 16 Default states on loss of comms On Off Latest Off Latest On Remote DPS inputs 5 DIRECT INPUTS Input points 32 Remote devices 16 Default states on loss of comms On Off Latest Off Latest On Ring configuratio...

Страница 56: ...e and carry 0 1 A max resistive load Minimum load impedance Operate time 0 6 ms Internal Limiting Resistor 100 2 W SOLID STATE OUTPUT RELAY Operate and release time 100 s Maximum voltage 265 V DC Maximum continuous current 5 A at 45 C 4 A at 65 C Make and carry for 0 2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37 90 for 0 03 s 300 A Breaking capacity CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT Capacity 100 mA D...

Страница 57: ...odbus RTU DNP 3 IEC 60870 5 103 Typical distance 1200 m Isolation 2 kV isolated together at 36 Vpk ETHERNET FIBER ETHERNET 10 100 MB TWISTED PAIR Modes 10 MB 10 100 MB auto detect Connector RJ45 SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL SNTP clock synchronization error 10 ms typical PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL PTP PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 version 2 Power Profile PP per IEEE Standard PC37 238TM2011 Slave only ordinar...

Страница 58: ...ee II Overvoltage category II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE RS422 1200 m G 703 100 m EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET 820 nm LED Multimode 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 1300 nm LED Multimode 21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm ELED Single mode 23 dBm 32 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm Laser Single mode 1 dBm 30 dBm 29 dB 1550 nm Laser Single mode 5 dBm 30...

Страница 59: ...ipple DC IEC 60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC 60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC 60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 10 Level 4 Voltage dip and interruptio...

Страница 60: ...leaning is not required but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000 6 5...

Страница 61: ...GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Protection System 2 31 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 ...

Страница 62: ...2 32 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 ...

Страница 63: ...to the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate si...

Страница 64: ...ounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi flush with the panel or switchgear door allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four...

Страница 65: ... 58 243 4 mm 7 00 177 7 mm 4 00 101 6 mm 7 10 180 2 mm 13 66 347 0 mm 14 03 356 2 mm 0 20 5 1 mm 1 55 39 3 mm 4 Places 0 213 5 41 mm Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Front View Vertical Enhanced Top View Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel CUTOUT Front of Panel Reference only Terminal Blocks Front Bezel Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Side View 843809A2 cdr ...

Страница 66: ...vertical UR series device GEK 113182 Connecting the side mounted UR V enhanced front panel to a vertically mounted horizontal UR series device For details on side mounting D60 devices with the standard front panel refer to the figures below 13 72 348 5 mm 7 00 177 8 mm 13 50 342 9 mm Front of panel Front bezel Panel Mounting bracket 1 57 39 9 mm 4 00 101 6 7 13 181 1 mm 0 46 11 7 mm 13 65 346 7 mm...

Страница 67: ...GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Protection System 3 5 3 HARDWARE 3 1 DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 6 D60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION STANDARD PANEL ...

Страница 68: ...ING REAR DIMENSIONS STANDARD PANEL C U T O U T 1 33 33 9 2 83 71 9 6 66 169 2 12 20 309 9 0 159 DIA 6 PLACES 4 0 0 213 DIA 5 4 4 PLACES SEE HOLES MARKED X INCHES MILLIMETERS 5 33 135 4 PANEL SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY VIEWED FROM FRONT X X X X 1 00 25 4 1 00 25 4 10 05 255 3 0 04 1 0 0 68 17 3 5 27 133 8 843753A3 cdr ...

Страница 69: ...rminal block See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments Figure 3 9 EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS X W V U T S P N M L K J H D G F B R 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 b 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 a a b c a b c a b c Optional direct input output module CPU module T module shown Optional contact input output module CT VT module Power supply module Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 837812A3 CDR Optional CT ...

Страница 70: ...Contact input H7a Contact input H7c Contact input H8a Contact input H8c Common H7b Surge H5 H6c H6a H6b H6 I V I V I V I V Fibre optic Ground at remote device Shielded twisted pairs Co axial cable COM D1a D2a D4b D3a D4a IRIG B input RS485 COM 2 Port 2 Port 1 CPU T Tx2 Rx2 Tx1 Rx1 BNC 8 CT VT 6 Inputs outputs 6 Inputs outputs 1 Power supply 9 CPU Typical configuration The AC signal path is configu...

Страница 71: ...er for dry contact input connections The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks det...

Страница 72: ... ground current input that is the same as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used CT VT modules with a sensiti...

Страница 73: ...n functions FlexLogic metering and communications The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits Reduces labor associated with design installation and testing of protection and control applications using the D60 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations Integrates seamlessly with existing D60 applications since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the ...

Страница 74: ...s open and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose out put is set to logic On 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting The voltage monitor is set to On 1 when there is a voltage across open contact the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2 5 mA and the current monitor is set to On 1 when the curren...

Страница 75: ...rm A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output Wherever a tilde symbol appears substitute with the slot position of the module wherever a number sign appears substitute the contact number When current monitoring is used to seal in the form A and solid state relay contact outputs the Flex Logic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to...

Страница 76: ...orm C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6U MODULE 6V MODULE 67 MODULE 4A MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Not Used 2 Form A 2 Form A 2 Form A 2 Solid State 3 Form A 3 For...

Страница 77: ...GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Protection System 3 15 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Figure 3 15 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 842762A3 CDR ...

Страница 78: ... IN 8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b DIGITAL I O 6T 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN ...

Страница 79: ... each contact group The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources 33 V DC for 48 V sources 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 V DC for 250 V sources Figure 3 17 DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde symbol appears ...

Страница 80: ...auto burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bounci...

Страница 81: ... output module has a total of 24 terminal connections These connections are arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assigned using ...

Страница 82: ... Setup software provided with the relay Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps Figure 3 22 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION Three wire shielded cable RTD terminals Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms for Platinum RTDs Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors RTD 8597...

Страница 83: ...ed together Though data is transmitted over a two wire twisted pair all RS485 devices require a shared reference or common voltage This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common Some systems allow the shield drain wire to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the D60 COM terminal 3 others function cor rectly only if the common wire is connected to the D60 COM terminal but i...

Страница 84: ...th communication ports An iso lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling To ensure maximum reliability all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown below Figure 3 24 RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c 100BASE FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS Ensure that the dust covers are insta...

Страница 85: ... B CONNECTION Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping When IRIG B is used as the time synchronization source for synchrophasors the DC level shifted option must be used in order to achieve the 1 Total Vector Error specified by the standard If amplitude modulated IRIG B is used it results in a 20 to 25 degree error in the synchrophasor angle measurement...

Страница 86: ...he interconnection for dual channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration That is two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path The required connections are UR1 Tx1 to UR2 Rx1 UR2 Tx1 to UR3 Rx1 UR3 Tx1 to UR4 Rx1 and UR4 Tx1 to UR1 Rx1 for the first ring and UR1 Tx2 to UR4 Rx2 UR4 Tx2 to UR3 Rx2 UR3...

Страница 87: ...epend on options purchased The options are outlined in the Inter Relay Communications section of the Order Code tables in Chapter 2 All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors 3 3 2 FIBER LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A 7B 7C 7H 7I and 7J fiber only modules Figure 3 29 LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 842013A2 CDR Channel 1 Channel 2 Tx1 UR 2 Tx2 Rx1...

Страница 88: ...owing figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber laser module Figure 3 31 2I AND 2J LASER FIBER MODULE Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye When using a laser Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831720A5 CDR 72 and 7D modules 73 and 7K module...

Страница 89: ...CTION BETWEEN TWO G 703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature can differ from one manufacturer to another Therefore it is not uncommon to see pinouts num bered TxA TxB RxA and RxB In such cases it can be assumed that A is equivalent to and B is equivalent to b G 703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1 With the power to the relay off remove the G 703 module 7R or 7S as follows Record the original location of the m...

Страница 90: ...g is disabled OFF d G 703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G 703 module internal timing mode and loop timing mode default Internal Timing Mode The system clock is generated internally Therefore the G 703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back to back UR to UR connections For back to back connections set for octet timing S1 OFF and timing mode to internal tim...

Страница 91: ...erface Figure 3 35 G 703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchest...

Страница 92: ...one clock input for the two RS422 channels The system functions correctly when the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature Terminal timing is a common fea ture to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source Using the terminal timing feature two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are...

Страница 93: ...nsure proper system operation For example the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 40 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS Data module 1 Data module 2 Signal name Signal name SD A Send data TT A Terminal timing TT B Terminal timing SD B Send data RD A Received data RD A Received data SD A Send data SD B Send data RD B Received data RD B Received ...

Страница 94: ...nd the shield only at one end For the direct fiber channel address power budget issues properly When using a LASER Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver Figure 3 41 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE data communications equipment units 3 3 7 G 703 AND FIBER...

Страница 95: ... T recommended G 704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows IEEE standard C37 94 for 1 128 kbps optical fiber interface for 2G and 2H modules or C37 94 for 2 64 kbps opti cal fiber interface for 76 and 77 modules Fiber optic cable ty...

Страница 96: ... module type 2G 2H 2I 2J 76 or 77 module as follows Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards...

Страница 97: ... is as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2...

Страница 98: ...ries C37 94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1 The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union ITU T recommended G 704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows Emulated IEEE standard emulates C37 94 fo...

Страница 99: ...d the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing selec...

Страница 100: ...is as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 20...

Страница 101: ...valid data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each yellow bit Solid red FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid ...

Страница 102: ...3 40 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 3 3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE 3 ...

Страница 103: ...d See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Software section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode relay connected to directly communicate with the D60 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sites can contain any ...

Страница 104: ...ocus to the already opened application If the file was a settings file has a URS extension that had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it is added back to the Settings List tree menu Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device order code compatible files or individual menu items Also the Settings List con...

Страница 105: ...and item size can change slightly from version to version of firm ware The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading downgrading the firmware is a resettable self test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does no...

Страница 106: ...nents 1 Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view 2 Main window menu bar 3 Main window tool bar 4 Site list control bar window 5 Settings list control bar window 6 Device data view windows with common tool bar 7 Settings file data view windows with common tool bar 8 Workspace area with data view tabs 9 Status bar 10 Quick action hot links Figure 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN...

Страница 107: ...led by default The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The setting...

Страница 108: ...able by clicking them The setting available to view is displayed against a yellow background as shown below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 7 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with ...

Страница 109: ...nly those settings available for editing Display all settings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 1 Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 3 Enter the te...

Страница 110: ...pecified by the template but all settings are shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It can be necessary at some point to remove a settings template Once a template is removed it cannot be reapplied and it is necessary to define a new settings te...

Страница 111: ...N ENTRIES The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow bac...

Страница 112: ...below and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number 1 Select the...

Страница 113: ...his infor mation can be compared with the D60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the D60 device or obtained from the D60 device Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the setting...

Страница 114: ...lay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a D60 device The D60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below Figure 4 12 DEVICE DEFINITI...

Страница 115: ...DEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceabilit...

Страница 116: ...EnerVista UR Setup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the hor...

Страница 117: ...e reset via the SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is applied all monitored inputs outputs and internal system...

Страница 118: ...ncludes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was...

Страница 119: ... on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands...

Страница 120: ...t eight user setting groups revisions 3 0x and higher support six setting groups For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions the relay panel shows eight setting groups Please note that the LEDs despite their default labels are fully user programmable The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2 The LEDs however are not pre programmed To match the pre printed label ...

Страница 121: ...nter and press the Print button in the front panel report window 5 When printing is complete fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels 6 Remove the D60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below...

Страница 122: ...l upwards as shown below 2 Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the D60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay ...

Страница 123: ...hown below This attaches the label tool to the LED label 3 Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below 4 Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the D60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels ...

Страница 124: ...il of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Страница 125: ...products support ur GET 8494A doc This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text x edit boxes The following procedure demonstrates how to install uninstall the custom panel labeling 1 Remove the clear Lexan Fr...

Страница 126: ... Background Template on top of the custom display module GE Multilin Part Number 1513 0069 and snap the clear custom module cover GE Multilin Part Number 1502 0015 over it and the templates 4 3 4 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a backlit liquid crystal display LCD to make them visible under poor lighting conditions While the keypad and display are not actively being used the display defaults...

Страница 127: ...reaker is operated in the three pole only mode 3 pole or in the one and three pole 1 pole mode selected by setting If the mode is selected as three pole a single input tracks the breaker open or closed posi tion If the mode is selected as one pole all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker For the following dis...

Страница 128: ... com mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes Press USER 1 To Select Breaker This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required This mes sage displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again BKR1 Name SELECTED USER 2 CLS USER 3 OP This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time Three possible actions can be performe...

Страница 129: ...key until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page This page con tains settings for System Setup Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header SECURITY From the Settings pa...

Страница 130: ...le the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They can be upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters FLASH MESSAGE TIME 1 0 s For example select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting MINIMUM 0 5 MAXI...

Страница 131: ...T key until the SECURITY message appears on the display 3 Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display 4 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message is displayed 5 After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message appears on the display press the VALUE keys change the selection to Programmed 6 Press the ENTER key 7 When the NEW SETT...

Страница 132: ...up to 10 characters and press the ENTER key 8 When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed re type in the same password and press ENTER 9 When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears your new Setting or Command Password will be active f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception A message prompts you ...

Страница 133: ...via the any external communications inter face three times within a three minute time span the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the D60 does not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to Off after the expiration of the ten minute timeout ...

Страница 134: ...4 32 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 ...

Страница 135: ...ee page 5 64 FAULT REPORTS See page 5 69 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 71 DATA LOGGER See page 5 73 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 74 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 77 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 78 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 80 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 86 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 86 DIRECT I O See page 5 89 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 96 INSTALLATION See pa...

Страница 136: ...MERS See page 5 160 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 161 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 166 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 167 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 255 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 257 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 259 TRIP OUTPUT See page 5 265 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5 271 OVERFREQUENCY See page 5 272 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE See p...

Страница 137: ...UTS See page 5 349 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 5 351 REMOTE DEVICES See page 5 352 REMOTE INPUTS See page 5 353 REMOTE DPS INPUTS See page 5 354 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 354 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 355 RESETTING See page 5 355 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5 356 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5 356 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 359 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 361 IEC 61850 GOOS...

Страница 138: ...scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F Some settings are specified in per unit pu calculated quantities pu quantity actual quantity base quantity Where the current source is from a single CT the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT Use the secondary current base to convert per unit current settings to from a secondary current value and use the primary cur re...

Страница 139: ...and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self resets once the operate element condition clears When set to Latched the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay EVENTS setting This setting is used to control whether the pickup dropout or operate states are recorded by the ev...

Страница 140: ...e For example in the scheme shown in the above diagram the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as Wdg1 I Once the sources have been configured the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro tection elements and as metered quantities b CT VT MODULE CONFIGURATION CT and VT input channels are contained in CT VT modules...

Страница 141: ...uired by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT VT module is mounted as the first character followed by numbers indicating the channel either 1 or 5 See the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and current banks For three phase channel sets the number of the lowe...

Страница 142: ...de to reset the relay to the factory defaults 2 Enter the reset code on the front panel under COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE SERVICE COMMAND 3 Change the default password of ChangeMe1 as outlined in the Setting Up CyberSentry and Changing Default Pass word section in the first chapter PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS A user account requires an alpha numeric password that meets the following requirements Password...

Страница 143: ... either by the user or by timeout via the setting and command level access timeout settings The remote setting and command ses sions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout The state of the session local or remote setting or command determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when ...

Страница 144: ... 2 Click the command or setting password Change button 3 Enter the new password in the New Password field Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section at the beginning of the chapter When an original password has already been used enter it in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button 4 Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field 5 Click the OK ...

Страница 145: ... TIMEOUT This setting specifies the length of inactivity no local or remote access required to return to restricted access from the command password level Dual Permission Security Access PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a rel...

Страница 146: ...ed for remote Ethernet or RS485 interfaces setting access supervision If this setting is On the default setting then remote setting access functions as normal that is a remote password is required If this setting is Off then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is pro vided If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand then the operand must be asserted set ...

Страница 147: ...red to enter a username and password ADDING A NEW USER The following pre requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system The user adding the account must have administrator rights The EnerVista security management system must be enabled previous section To add user accounts 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management window 2...

Страница 148: ...ctual values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges When any of the Settings Event Recorder and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselve...

Страница 149: ...cation RADIUS only No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device nor are they ever transmitted without cryptographic protection Only TCP UDP ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are open All the other ports are closed For example Modbus is on by default so its TCP port number 502 is ope...

Страница 150: ...rotection System GE Multilin 5 2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH ENERVISTA CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device Settings Product Setup Security Figure 5 3 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY PANEL ...

Страница 151: ... 65535 1812 Administrator Primary Accounting Port RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 Administrator Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor specific attributes used with the protocol Value that represents General Electric Administrator RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret Shared secret used in authentication It displays as asterisks This setting must meet the CyberSentry password requi...

Страница 152: ...disabled To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes and then the Administrator can re enable device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled Administrator Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware upgrades If Yes and the firmware upgrade attempt is made the device denies the upgrade and displays an error message that the lock is set On e...

Страница 153: ... Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not approve changes after the fact Only Supervisor can set the Settings and Firmware Lock in the Security Settings This role also has the ability to forcefully logoff any other role and clear the security event log This role can also be disabled but only through a Supervisor authentication When this role is disabled its ...

Страница 154: ...Supervisor approval can change the role associated password In CyberSentry password encryption is not supported Session Settings PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY SESSION SETTINGS The following session settings are available SESSION LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of failed authentications the default is three and the maxi mum is 99 before the device blocks subsequent authentication a...

Страница 155: ...cepts setting changes and whether the device can receive a firmware upgrade This setting can be changed only by the Supervisor role if it is enabled or by the Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled The Supervisor role enables this setting for the relay to start accepting setting changes or command changes or firmware upgrade After all the setting changes are applied or com mands executed...

Страница 156: ...y security use the following procedure for set up 1 Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the Value keys on the front panel to enter the default password ChangeMe1 Note that the Lock relay setting needs to be disabled in the Security Supervisory menu When this setting is disabled configuration and firmware upgrade are possible By default this setting is disabled 2 Enable the Supervisor rol...

Страница 157: ...changes log out When changing settings offline ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the set tings download are changed because only those changes are applied Pushbuttons both user control buttons and user programmable buttons located on the front panel can be pressed by an Administrator or Engineer role This also applies to the reset button which resets targets where targe...

Страница 158: ...hentication Failed 2 User Lockout 3 FW Upgrade 4 FW Lock 5 Settings Lock 6 Settings Change Because this can fill the entire event log it is supported by the already existing Settings_Change log file This event is not required 7 Clear Oscillography command 8 Clear Data Logger command not applicable to all UR products 9 Clear Demand Records command not applicable to all UR products 10 Clear Energy c...

Страница 159: ...easure ments at the fractional volt level can be affected by noise Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig nal The D60 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substituted with z...

Страница 160: ... used to clear records the user programma ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON 2 Set the propertie...

Страница 161: ... ports If IEC 60870 103 is chosen as the protocol valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit s and valid parity is Even RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after receiv ing data from a host This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL POR...

Страница 162: ...55 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 255 255 0 where LAN3 is 10 3 1 x 255 255 255 0 Example 2 IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN1 is 10 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 11 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN2 is 11 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 12 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN3 is 12 x x x 255 0 0 0 Example 3 Incorrect IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 10 2 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 0 0 0 This example is incorr...

Страница 163: ...P3 uses the IP and MAC address of P2 Figure 5 6 MULTIPLE LANS WITH REDUNDANCY Multiple LANS No Redundancy The following topology provides local configuration monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1 to which port 1 P1 is connected access to the public network on LAN2 to which port 2 P2 is connected and communications with SCADA on LAN3 to which port 3 P3 is connected There is no redundancy Fi...

Страница 164: ...set to None ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC IP and mask addresses If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address IP address and mask The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its l...

Страница 165: ... included in UR 7 that allows for detection of link failures The purpose of the Far End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there is a problem with one of the fibers Without the Far End Fault feature it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a prob lem that affects only its transmit fiber When the Far End Fault feature is supported a l...

Страница 166: ...ded to align PRP with the High availability Seamless Redundancy HSR protocol To achieve this the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 ver sion The revised standard IEC 62439 3 2012 is commonly referred to as PRP 1 while the original standard is PRP 0 The UR relays support only PRP 1 The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports specifically Port 2...

Страница 167: ...d by Static Routes To delete a route 1 Replace the route destination with the default loopback address 127 0 0 1 When deleting a route the mask and gateway must be also brought back to default values 2 Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127 0 0 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED BY STATIC ROUTES The following rules are validated internally The route ...

Страница 168: ... 1 1 1 Port 2 IP address 10 1 2 2 connects the UR to LAN 10 1 2 0 24 and to the EnerVista software through Router 2 Router 2 has an interface on 10 1 2 0 24 and the IP address of this interface is 10 1 2 1 The configuration before release 7 10 was as follows PRT1 IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 2 PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 255 0 PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 1 PRT2 IP ADDRESS 10 1 2 2 PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 ...

Страница 169: ...ance with protocol specifications for broadcast messages never replies Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur Generally each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1 When using Modbus TCP IP the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field S...

Страница 170: ...NG DNP CHANNEL 1 2 PORT SETTINGS RS232 RS485 ETHERNET DNP Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 none Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth UDP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 RS485 Modbus DNP DNP Modbus IEC 61850 C...

Страница 171: ... 100000 MESSAGE DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP PF SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 ...

Страница 172: ...ting is set to Network UDP the channel 1 DNP protocol can be used over UDP IP on the Ethernet ports See the DNP appendix for information on the DNP protocol Changes to these settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave...

Страница 173: ... containing analog input data These settings group the D60 analog input data into the following types current voltage power energy power factor and other Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type For example to trigger unsolic ited responses from the D60 when any current values change by 15 A the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set t...

Страница 174: ...ISTS Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870 5 104 protocol can be configured The value for each point is user programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs MME points The menu for the binary input points DNP or MSP points IEC 60870 5 ...

Страница 175: ...ame criticality as protection element settings To ensure reliable performance of protection schemes utilizing 61850 messaging it can be desirable to route 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications or to use redundant inde pendent ports and a high speed network recovery method such as PRP The D60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS protocol as specified by IEC 6185...

Страница 176: ...at time interval The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE fixed D60 GOOSE and configurable GOOSE The GSSE settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSEE These settings are applicable to GSSE only If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled GSSE messages are not transmitted The GSSE ID setting repr...

Страница 177: ...previous to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the D60 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the select...

Страница 178: ...asets 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The D60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of t...

Страница 179: ...ransfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5 6 GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES ...

Страница 180: ...nd must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 t...

Страница 181: ...ined by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between D60 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset con tains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in ...

Страница 182: ...ese two data items The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands First the REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 that is the first configurable dataset Then REMOTE IN 1 16 ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance...

Страница 183: ...en the D60 is restarted Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client server functionality is not required IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality GOOSE GSSE inter device communication and client server communication If the GOOSE GSSE functiona...

Страница 184: ...band values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con straint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db value shall re...

Страница 185: ...d to control the D60 virtual inputs The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4 When this value is changed the D60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re instantiated and contain...

Страница 186: ... not all values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points associated...

Страница 187: ...to a value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the D60 Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the D60 is restarted It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some but not all data from already existing GGIO1 GGIO4 and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset REPORT 1 DATASET I...

Страница 188: ...n can result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS ...

Страница 189: ...plete details on these control models The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value To be successful the IEC 61850 operate com mand must be executed after the select command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SET...

Страница 190: ... TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols n TFTP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP can be used to transfer files from the D60 over a network The D60 operates as a TFTP server TFTP client software is available from various sources including Microsoft Windows NT The dir txt file obtained fro...

Страница 191: ...r of mea sured value short floating point value points can be used to change threshold values from the default for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point Whenever power is removed and re applied to the D60 the default thresholds are in effect The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not If redundancy is set to Yes two simultaneous connections can be ac...

Страница 192: ...n a communication line so the entire range of 254 addresses is never exhausted IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT This setting defines the time that the D60 waits for a synchronization message The D60 synchro nizes its clock using all available sources with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the other sources Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870 5 103 master is l...

Страница 193: ...Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU as defined in IEC60870 5 103 The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received from the controller or reported spontaneously Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests If the D60 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time it demands access for Class 1...

Страница 194: ...5 SETTINGS 5 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC60870 5 103 IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS ASDU 1 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 2 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 3 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 4 Range see sub menu below ...

Страница 195: ...SSAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 FACTOR 1 000 Range 0 000 to 65 535 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 OFFSET 0 Range 32768 to 32767 in steps of 1 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP 9 Range 3 or 9 MESSAGE ASDU 4 FUN 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 INF 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT 0 Range 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 ANALOG 1 Off Range FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE AS...

Страница 196: ... not allowed to skip ASDU2 and configure measurands in ASDU3 ANALOG FACTOR AND OFFSET For each measurand included in the ASDU a factor and offset can also be configured The factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands The final measurement sent to the IEC60870 103 mas ter is then a x b where x is the measurand a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset The master has to p...

Страница 197: ...fferent virtual inputs Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type FUN and information number INF If the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command the relay rejects it Table 5 7 COMMANDS MAPPING TABLE IEC103 COMMANDS COMMAND 0 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 1 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 31 Ran...

Страница 198: ...cy as an electronic watch approximately 1 minute per month 23 ppm Once the RTC is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol PTP IRIG B or SNTP its accuracy approaches that of the synchroniz ing time delivered to the relay The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting configures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source to determine which of the available external time sources to use for time...

Страница 199: ...LOCK PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL 1588 PTP PORT 1 3 The UR supports the Precision Time Protocol PTP specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile PP specified in IEEE Std C37 238 2011 This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet net work that implements PP The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP Time acc...

Страница 200: ... relay s real time clock The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP STRICT POWER PROFILE Power profile IEEE Std C37 238 2011 requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant clocks that the delivered time have worst case error of 1 µs and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented With the strict power profile setting enabled the relay will...

Страница 201: ...seconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from the relay For instance if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the switch to the relay is 11 000 ns then the mean d...

Страница 202: ...TC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC such as PTP or SNTP the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided PTP ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time When a communications protocol other than PTP provides UTC to local time offset meaning IRIG B that offset is used instead of the local time and daylight t...

Страница 203: ...ds waiting for the fault report trigger If trigger does not occur within this time the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance Fault current and voltage phasors one cycle after the trigger Elements operated at the time of triggering Events 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger only available via the relay webpage Fault duration times for each breaker created by the breaker arcing cur...

Страница 204: ...ORT 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection The FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic operand representing the protection element elements requiring operational fault location calculations The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal The FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG and FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG impedances are entered in sec...

Страница 205: ... etc A trigger position of 25 consists of 25 pre and 75 post trigger data The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter element state contact input virtual output etc The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals that is current and voltage are stored Reducing the sam...

Страница 206: ...s used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display It can be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed All eight CT VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file The CT VT module channels are named as follows slot_letter t...

Страница 207: ...log DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE Continuous Range Continuous Trigger MESSAGE DATA LOGGER TRIGGER Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DATA LOGGER RATE 60000 ms Range 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 2 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A Fl...

Страница 208: ...arameters available in a given relay are dependent on the type of relay the type and number of CT VT hardware modules installed and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed Upon startup the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters The parameter index number s...

Страница 209: ...EDs are controlled by the test sequence rather than the protection control and monitor ing features However the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states on or off in memory When the test completes the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets w...

Страница 210: ...ecessary to test all LEDs Next release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2 Once stage 2 has started the pushbutton can be released When stage 2 is completed stage 3 will automatically start The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton c TRIP AND ALARM LEDS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP ALARM LEDS The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED col...

Страница 211: ...4 operand BREAKER 2 OPEN LED 3 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 3 LED 15 operand BREAKER 2 CLOSED LED 4 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 4 LED 16 operand BREAKER 2 TROUBLE LED 5 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 5 LED 17 operand SYNC 1 SYNC OP LED 6 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 6 LED 18 operand SYNC 2 SYNC OP LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off LED 8 operand Off LED 20 operand Off LED 9 operand BREAKER 1 OPEN LED 21 oper...

Страница 212: ... groups and invoking and scrolling though user programmable displays Firmware revisions 3 2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control This functionality has been retained if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons they cannot be used as user program mable control pushbuttons The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following fi...

Страница 213: ...n the event record as per user setting when a control pushbutton is pressed No event is logged when the pushbutton is released The faceplate keys including control keys cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed The control pushbuttons become user programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control via the USE...

Страница 214: ... The user programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection The user configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Self Reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 OFF TE...

Страница 215: ...red in non volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power The pushbutton is reset deactivated in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set ting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY set tings These settings enable ...

Страница 216: ...atile memory Should the power supply be lost the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT This setting specifies the top 20 character line of the user programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton See the User definable Displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the key...

Страница 217: ...le to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed However ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand...

Страница 218: ... Lock SETTING Off 0 Local Lock SETTING Off 0 Set SETTING Off 0 Reset SETTING Enabled Disabled Autoreset Function FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND AND AND AND TIMER 50 ms 0 TIMER 50 ms 0 SETTING Autoreset Delay TPKP 0 TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Drop Out Timer TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON To user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2 842024A2 L...

Страница 219: ...ING any FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING Flash Message Time TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 842021A3 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SETTING TRST 0 Instantaneous reset LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX Top Text XXXXXXXXXX On Text The message is temporarily removed i...

Страница 220: ...S and ACTUAL VALUES top level menus The sub menus facili tate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content Once programmed the user definable displays can be viewed in two ways KEYPAD Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user definable display note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be sc...

Страница 221: ...e tilde character is used to mark the start of a data field the length of the data field needs to be accounted for Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display the nth tilde refers to the nth item A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface preferred for convenience The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the...

Страница 222: ... and bottom line items are different USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE Current X A Shows user defined text with first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE Current Y A Shows user defined text with second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 1 6016 Shows decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 2 6357 Shows decimal form of user selecte...

Страница 223: ...naled by the following FlexLogic operands 1 DIRECT RING BREAK direct input output ring break This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR series relay are not being received back by the relay 2 DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF direct device offline These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output messages from at least one direct device are not being r...

Страница 224: ...PPORTED DATA RATES 74 Channel 1 64 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 7L Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7M Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7P Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7T Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps 7W Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7V Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 2A Channel 1 64 kbps 2B Cha...

Страница 225: ...re con nected via single channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below Figure 5 18 INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS In the above application the following settings should be applied For UR series IED 1 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 1 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps For UR series IED 2 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 ...

Страница 226: ...both rings are healthy IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 4 0 4 of power system cycle IED 3 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken say TX2 RX2 the delivery times are as follows IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of ...

Страница 227: ...ECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes For UR series IED 3 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 3 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes In this configuration the following delivery times are expected at 128 kbps IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 5 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of...

Страница 228: ...LARMS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O CRC ALARM CH1 2 The D60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32 bit CRC The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check The monitoring function counts all incoming messages including messages that failed the CRC check A separate ...

Страница 229: ...d Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10 4 c UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARMS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 The D60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages In the ring configuration all messages originating a...

Страница 230: ...R OF TERMINALS is 3 three terminal system set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2 For a two terminal system the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 redundant channels LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER In installa tions that use multiplexers or modems it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays ...

Страница 231: ...relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to Programmed This setting is defaulted to Not Programmed when at the factory The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the Programmed state The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay This name will appear on generated reports INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed Range Not Programmed Pro...

Страница 232: ...nd consists of the following steps Configure the field units This establishes the point to point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module and a specific digital core on a specific Brick This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay Configure the AC banks This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages AC bank co...

Страница 233: ...he ground CT primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input may be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating must matc...

Страница 234: ...tage which would be 115 66 4 On a 14 4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400 120 the voltage value entered would be 120 that is 14400 120 5 4 2 POWER SYSTEM PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available sig...

Страница 235: ...tions The frequency tracking feature functions only when the D60 is in the Programmed mode If the D60 is Not Pro grammed then metering values are available but can exhibit significant errors 5 4 3 SIGNAL SOURCES PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1 4 Identical menus are available for each source The SRC 1 text can be replaced by with a user defined name appropriate for the associated...

Страница 236: ... elements in the relay for example VT Fuse Failure detec tor or Fault Report It can also be used to supervise current based elements to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings or external CT wiring problem A disturbance detector is provided for each source The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents The disturbance detector scheme logic is as foll...

Страница 237: ...re shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application and the CT VT inputs that are used to provide the data Figure 5 26 EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER CT VT MODULE 1 CT VT MODULE 2 CT VT MODULE 3 CTs VTs not applicable Y LV D HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT None Non...

Страница 238: ... CLOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 070 ...

Страница 239: ...ve is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open If a separate 52 b contact input is not available then the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can...

Страница 240: ... SETTING Enabled BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL USER 2 OFF ON To open BRK1 Name SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C To breaker control logic shee...

Страница 241: ...RAND BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN BREAKER 1 INTERM ΦA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole BREAKER 1 MODE SETTING Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM SETTING Off BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND OR OR SETTING B...

Страница 242: ...ated to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 MODE This setting selects 3 Pole mode where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary switch or 1 Pole mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAG...

Страница 243: ...input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 B CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If the mode is selected as single pole this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A SWITCH 1 B OPENED If t...

Страница 244: ...ITCH 1 ΦB INTERM FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SWITCH 1 Φ BAD ST C SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM 859713A1 CDR SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY 0 SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN SETTING Off SWITCH 1 OPEN SETTING Disabled Enabled SWITCH 1 FUNCTION AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD OR OR AND AND...

Страница 245: ...0 00 to 0 98 and 1 03 to 20 00 This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points To enter a custom FlexCurve enter the reset and operate times using the VALUE keys for each selected pickup point using the MESSAGE UP DOWN keys for the desired protection curve A B C or D FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table...

Страница 246: ...with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples There are 41 recloser curve types supported These definite oper ating times are useful to coordinate operating times typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initializ...

Страница 247: ...00 ms see below Figure 5 31 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 32 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software g...

Страница 248: ...OSER CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Страница 249: ...1 AND GE201 Figure 5 36 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Страница 250: ...VES GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Страница 251: ...22 Figure 5 40 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Страница 252: ...nt locations within the power system are networked to a central location The D60 offers PMU features over two communication standards IEC 61850 9 5 and IEEE C37 118 The figure shows complete Synchrophasor implementation Figure 5 41 COMPLETE SYNCHROPHASOR IMPLEMENTATION UR Implementation of IEC 61850 90 5 Synchrophasor data as measured and calculated by phasor measurement units PMUs is used to asse...

Страница 253: ... number of PMUs and aggregators vary by product as outlined in the table The figure shows an example of an N60 using four Logical Device PMUs Logical Device 2 through 5 and four aggrega tors The control blocks for the aggregators are located in LD1 A 64 char LDName setting is provided Figure 5 42 N60 EXAMPLE FOR FOUR LOGICAL DEVICE PMUS Precise time input to the relay from the international time s...

Страница 254: ...aggregator inherits the Sample Rate SmpRate and IEEE C37 118 Class P or M of that PMU The value of the SmpRate DO in the Report Control Block is set based on the value of the Sample Rate in the PMU The Class of the Dataset are mapped into the MSVID of the Dataset see text below for the overall name of the MSVID If other PMUs are mapped into the same aggregator with different Sample Rates or from d...

Страница 255: ...ze of each PMU data set for version 7 2 and later using FCDA data non structured data EXAMPLE PROTECTION SYNCHROPHASORS DATA SET WITH REPORTING RATE 60 FRAMES SECOND This example gives the protection synchrophasors data set with a reporting rate of 60 frames per second P60MMXU1 See the figure earlier Logical Nodes Supported in Each Logical Device This data or list of items as shown in the followin...

Страница 256: ...NG IEC 61850 90 5 The D60 is expected to send the CFG 2 file IEEE C37 118 config file upon request from the upstream synchrophasor devices for example P30 without stopping R SV multicasting as shown in the figure below The primary domain control ler PDC does not need to use a stop start data stream command if the UR protocol is set to IEC 61850 90 5 prior to requesting the configuration via CFG 2 ...

Страница 257: ...s information via the CFG 2 file for a given aggregator when the aggregator is set to 90 5 the version number of the CFG 2 file found in bits 0 3 of the frame SYNC word which should presently be set to 2 is set as follows The PMU settings are organized in logical groups as follows PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 VALUE DECIMAL OF ASDUS 11 1 12 2 13 3 14 ...

Страница 258: ...ular MESSAGE PMU 1 RATE 10 sec Range 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 5 sec 10 sec 12 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 50 sec 60 sec 100 sec 120 sec MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 1 Range 16 character ASCII string MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 14 Range 16 character ASCII str...

Страница 259: ...e superset the content to be sent out or recorded When one source is selected by one PMU it cannot be selected by another PMU PMU 1 CLASS Range P M None This setting selects the synchrophasor class Note that a reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be selected for class P synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz respectively PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT This setting selects betwe...

Страница 260: ...oncurrently with the synchrophasor instant These values are mapped into a two byte integer number with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16 PMU1 D CH 1 NM to PMU1 D CH 16 NM These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels Sixteen character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame PMU1 D...

Страница 261: ...respectively as specified in the IEC 61850 standard IEC 61850 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT BASIC CONFIGURATION PMU1 PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURA TION 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PMU1 LDINST A user defined visible string maximum 64 char ASCII test to assign Logical Device LD Inst for a PMU LD As per IEC 61850 6 standard specification the PMU LD Name is the concatenat...

Страница 262: ... steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE ...

Страница 263: ...control purposes without applying this correction 4 When connected to line to line voltages the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE This setting allows correcting positive and negative sequence currents for vector groups of power transform...

Страница 264: ...eeds to be implemented using FlexLogic e USER TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles f FREQUENCY TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENC...

Страница 265: ...g as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 48 FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC g VOLTAGE TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW VOLT 0 800 pu Range 0 250 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH...

Страница 266: ...n using the recorder in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 49 VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC h CURRENT TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER This element responds to elevated current The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit PMU source All current channel A...

Страница 267: ...er 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current or the product of nominal secondary voltage the VT ratio and the nominal primary current For the three phase power 1 pu is three times that for a single phase power The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 0...

Страница 268: ...IGGER PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of...

Страница 269: ...on positive df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the fall ing direction negative df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting can be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO...

Страница 270: ...E ROCOF df dt SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL df dt RAISE OR df dt FALL RUN SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 0 t DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER Off 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame 847012A1 CDR AND O...

Страница 271: ...amount of pre trigger data as a percent of the entire record This setting applies only to the timed mode of recording l AGGREGATORS PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU AGGREGATOR 1 When the protocol selection is set via the software or keypad all aggregators whose protocol is not set to None are set to the last protocol saved that is IEEE C37 118 or IEC 61850 90 5 to any aggrega...

Страница 272: ...TOR1 PDC CONTROL The synchrophasor standard allows for user defined controls originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands Each aggregator supports 16 FlexLogic operands as shown in the table The operands are asserted for 5 seconds fo...

Страница 273: ...rol bit 1 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 2 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 3 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as received via the network as above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network Table 5 15 NUMBER OF ASDU SETTINGS FOR ASDU TRANSMISSI...

Страница 274: ...guration revision every time the configuration is changed This setting allows the user to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295 MSVCB 1 PRIORITY A value from 0 through 7 The default value is 4 MSVCB 1 IP Class The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services formerly called TypeOfService value The default value is set for Expedited Forwarding 101110B 46 or 2EH This...

Страница 275: ...GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Protection System 5 141 5 SETTINGS 5 4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 1 yes no 2 yes yes ENUMERATION AUTHENTICATION ENCRYPTION ...

Страница 276: ... applies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators If more complex logic than presented above is required it is implemented via FlexLogic For example if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element the two con...

Страница 277: ...IS 1 ON IF Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exis...

Страница 278: ...ess via dead time 2 A three pole reclosure is in progress via dead time 3 A three pole reclosure is in progress via dead time 4 Autoreclosure is in lockout state Reclosure of breaker 1 is blocked Reclosure of breaker 2 is blocked Reclose breaker 1 signal Reclose breaker 2 signal Force any trip to a three phase trip The first CLOSE BKR X signal has been issued Shot count is equal to 1 Shot count is...

Страница 279: ... one position to another Breaker 1 phase B is closed Breaker 1 phase B is open Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected discrepancy between the 52 a and 52 b contacts Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Breaker 1 phase C is closed Breaker 1 phase C is open Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole Breaker 1 is closed Breaker 1 is open Breake...

Страница 280: ...e asserts transmit bit no 3 Directional blocking1 scheme de asserts transmit bit no 4 Directional blocking1 scheme has operated to trip phase A Directional blocking1 scheme has operated to trip phase B Directional blocking1 scheme has operated to trip phase C Directional blocking1 scheme has tripped all 3 phases Directional blocking1 scheme has operated ELEMENT Sensitive directional power DIR POWE...

Страница 281: ...sfer trip has tripped all three phases Hybrid permissive over reaching transfer trip has operated ELEMENT Non volatile latches LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF Non volatile latch 1 is ON Logic 1 Non volatile latch 1 is OFF Logic 0 LATCH 2 to LATCH 16 Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1 ELEMENT Line pickup LINE PICKUP OP LINE PICKUP PKP LINE PICKUP DPO LINE PICKUP I A LINE PICKUP I B LINE PICKUP I C LI...

Страница 282: ...al for the CA phase distance elements is established Remote open pole condition detected in phase A Remote open pole condition detected in phase B Remote open pole condition detected in phase C Open pole detector is operated Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase A Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase B Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase C ELEMENT...

Страница 283: ...ase A to ground fault is detected Phase B to ground fault is detected Phase C to ground fault is detected Single line to ground fault is detected Phase A to B fault is detected Phase B to C fault is detected Phase C to A fault is detected Phase A to B to ground fault is detected Phase B to C to ground fault is detected Phase C to A to ground fault is detected Three phase symmetrical fault is detec...

Страница 284: ...ip phase B Permissive over reaching transfer trip ground has operated to trip phase C Permissive over reaching transfer trip ground has operated to trip all three phases ELEMENT Power swing detect POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING 50DD POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING ...

Страница 285: ...PO SRC1 VT FF VOL LOSS Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out Source 1 has lost voltage signals V2 below 10 and V1 below 5 of nominal SRC1 VT NEU WIRE OPEN Source 1 VT neutral wire open detected When the VT is connected in Delta this function should not be enabled because there is no neutral wire for Delta connected VT SRC2 VT FF to SRC4 VT...

Страница 286: ...IP PHASE B TRIP PHASE C TRIP AR INIT 3 POLE TRIP FORCE 3 POLE TRIP OUTPUT OP TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT Trip all three breaker poles A single pole trip and reclose operation is initiated Trip breaker pole A initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole B initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole C initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose Initiate a three...

Страница 287: ...E A LED PHASE B LED PHASE C LED NEUTRAL GROUND Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on Asserted when the ...

Страница 288: ...jor self test errors generated major error Any of the minor self test errors generated minor error Any self test errors generated generic any error The battery is not functioning Return power supply module to manufacturer Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard A direct device is configured but not connected The Direct I O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring The...

Страница 289: ...ifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters One shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is a maximum of 64 one shots NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot tha...

Страница 290: ... 16 17 through 25 to AND 9 and the outputs from these two gates to AND 2 Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator If so the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output For the example shown above the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR ...

Страница 291: ...ier to start at the out put end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustomed to using FlexLogic it is suggested that a worksheet with a series o...

Страница 292: ...he set of parame ters into a logic diagram The result of this process is shown below which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia gram as a check Figure 5 60 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6 Repeating the process described for virtual output 3 select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4 99 The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter Virt Op ...

Страница 293: ... cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic this may be difficult to achieve but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service In the following equation virtual ou...

Страница 294: ...LOGIC EQUATION EDITOR PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR There are 512 FlexLogic entries available numbered from 1 to 512 with default END entry settings If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry the associated state flag will never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 5 6 FL...

Страница 295: ...ION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level Delta MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTIO...

Страница 296: ...e Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX ELE...

Страница 297: ...nction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac teristics as shown in the figure below FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR ...

Страница 298: ...l analog actual values measured by the relay The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per unit values using the following definitions of the base units Table 5 20 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle dcmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs DELTA TIME BASE 1 µs FREQUEN...

Страница 299: ...RENT IBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SOURCE ENERGY Positive and Negative Watthours Positive and Negative Varhours EBASE 10000 MWh or MVAh respectively SOURCE POWER PBASE maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE maximum primary RMS value of a...

Страница 300: ...erted the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 65 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latc...

Страница 301: ...in this chapter See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements section for additional details SETTING GROUP 1 LINE PICKUP See ...

Страница 302: ...ine is being re energized from the local ter minal pickup of an overreaching zone 2 or excessive phase current within eight power cycles after the autorecloser issues a close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic operand For security the overcurrent trip is supervised by LINE PICKUP LINE PICKUP FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LINE PICKUP SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range S...

Страница 303: ...hen reclosing This philosophy can be programmed via the autore close scheme Figure 5 66 LINE PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC 5 DQG RQO 2 OLQH HQG RSHQ 25 1 1 1 1 1 25 25 25 1 25 F FOHV SX SX SX 1 25 1 1 1 25 PV 1 1 6 77 1 QDEOHG LVDEOHG XQFWLRQ 6 77 1 2II ORFN 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 77 1 6LJQDO 6RXUFH 6 77 1 QDEOHG LVDEOHG XWRUHFORVH RRUGLQDWLRQ SDVV 2 23 5 1 6 1 67 3 3 3 67 3 3 6 77 1 QDEOHG LVDEOHG LVWDQFH 7ULS 6 77...

Страница 304: ...e nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close in reverse three phase faults For this purpose the maxi mum fault clearing time breaker fail time in the substation should be considered On the other hand the MEMORY DURA TION cannot be too long as the power system may e...

Страница 305: ...ory polarization cannot be applied permanently but for a limited time only the self polarization may be applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority In firmware 7 20 when the fast distance algorithm is applied the HardFiber brick is not supported The fast dis tance algorithm is supported by the D60 It is not supported by the HardFiber which maintains the original distance element ...

Страница 306: ... SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 ohms Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 C...

Страница 307: ...ation of associated mem ory action PHS DIST Z1 DIR All phase distance zones are reversible The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle The non directional zone spans between the for ward reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings and the reverse reach imped ance defined by PHS DIST Z...

Страница 308: ...IRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC Figure 5 70 DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837802A1 CDR X R RCA COMP LIMIT R E V R E A C H R E A C H REV REACH RCA 837721A1 CDR X R RE AC H RCA DIR RCA DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD ...

Страница 309: ...03A1 CDR X R R E AC H RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD R E V R E AC H REV REACH RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT 837722A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 60o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o...

Страница 310: ...ting shall be set to Yd1 The zone is restricted by the potential point location of the VTs as illustrated in Figure e PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone In section a of the following figure zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding The...

Страница 311: ...when zone 1 is disabled PHS DIST Z1 RCA This setting specifies the characteristic angle similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications In the non directional appli cations this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance The reverse reach impedance in the non direc tional applications is set in...

Страница 312: ... the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting This setting applies only to the quadri lateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral characteristic see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures PHS DIS...

Страница 313: ...DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING PH DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR AND OR 837036A1 CDR from the open pole element D60 L60 and L90 only FLEXLOGIC OPERAND O...

Страница 314: ...NG Off 0 PH DIST Z1 BLK SETTING IA IB IB IC DISTANCE SOURCE IC IA VAG VBG VBG VCG VCG VAG VAB VBC VCA V_1 I_1 Wye VTs Delta VTs SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR RUN A B ELEMENT RUN B C ELEMENT RUN C A ELEMENT PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT B...

Страница 315: ... 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT Zero seq Range Zero seq Neg seq MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG 0 0 Range 40 0 to 40 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT 90 Range 30 to 90 in steps...

Страница 316: ...und elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SET TINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu The common distance settings noted at the start of this section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground dist...

Страница 317: ...ND DIST Z1 ZOM Z1 MAG The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zero sequence mutual coupling between parallel lines If this compensation is required the ground current from the parallel line 3I_0 measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the CT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE This setting specif...

Страница 318: ...everse GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non directional GND DIST Z1 DIR setting This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to Quad and controls the polarizing current used by the reactance comparator of ...

Страница 319: ... spuri ous neutral current during switch off transients three phase faults and phase to phase faults a positive sequence current restraint of 5 is applied to the neutral current supervision magnitude This setting should be at least three times the CURRENT CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu Zone 1 is sealed in with the current supervision GND DIST Z1 VOLT LE...

Страница 320: ...Z2 PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 PKP C TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP Z2 GR TMR INIT OR OR OR AND OR AND OR AND AN...

Страница 321: ...IST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA TIMER 1 cycle 1 cycle SETTING GND DIST Z1 SUPV RUN IN 0 05 I_1 Pickup FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 DPO A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 DPO B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 DPO C FLEXLOGIC OP...

Страница 322: ...he supervision for zones 2 and 5 is removed during open pole conditions 837011AL CDR AND AND AND OR Quadrilateral characteristic only AND OR MEMORY V_1 0 80 pu I_1 0 025 pu SETTING Enabled 1 GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION SETTING Off 0 GND DIST Z2 BLK SETTING IA IB DISTANCE SOURCE IC VAG VBG VCG V_1 I_1 Wye VTs SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 ZOM Z1 ANG RUN A ELEMENT RUN B ELEMENT RUN C ELEMENT GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT...

Страница 323: ...teps of 0 001 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD REACH 50 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID 60 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT 70 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD RCA 75 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE POWER SWING REV REACH 50 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps ...

Страница 324: ...GT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSA...

Страница 325: ...ration The out of step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the imped ance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays...

Страница 326: ... 5 Figure 5 87 POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5 88 EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS OUTER M I D D L E I N N E R R E V R C A F W D R C A RE V RE AC H INNER LIM IT ANGLE MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE OUTER LIMIT ANGLE 827843A2 CDR FW D RE AC H R X 842734A1 CDR ...

Страница 327: ...nditions The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus the locus enters the inner characteristic The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus the locus leaving the outer characteristic This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre defined number of...

Страница 328: ...arac teristic The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho POWER SWING FWD RCA This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteris tics angles of all the blinders and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics POWER SWING REV REACH This se...

Страница 329: ...LAY 2 Controls the out of step tripping function in the three step mode only This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out of step tripping sequence is completed This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastes...

Страница 330: ... REGION INNER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN RUN RUN RUN POWER SWING REV REACH POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD POWER SWING SHAPE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD POWER SWING FWD REACH POWER SWING SUPV POWER SWING REV RCA POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD POWER SWING FWD RCA POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD POWER SWING FU...

Страница 331: ...WER SWING SOURCE I_0 I_1 I_2 I_0 I_0 K_0 SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION Enabled 1 I_1 I_1 K_1 I_2 I_2 K_2 RUN OR I_0 I_1 I_2 present values I_0 I_1 I_2 half a cycle old values K_0 K_2 three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 four times the average change over last power cycle AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 0 10 cycles TIMER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD ...

Страница 332: ...R SWING SEAL IN DELAY POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP POWER SWING BLK Off 0 POWER SWING TRIP MODE POWER SWING MODE POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING UN BLOCK POWER SWING 50DD POWER...

Страница 333: ...ilateral distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in steps of 1...

Страница 334: ... the element as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the ...

Страница 335: ...es that the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98 of the pickup value the variable must be reduced Two methods of this resetting operation are available Instantaneous and Timed The Instan taneous selection is intended for applications wit...

Страница 336: ...780 5 564 4 255 3 416 2 845 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 689 2 0 32 358 14 055 5 885 3 597 2 616 2 103 1 799 1 605 1 472 1 378 4 0 64 716 2...

Страница 337: ...0 4 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 40...

Страница 338: ...1 488 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1...

Страница 339: ...justable from instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 13 EQ 5 14 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The D60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves See the FlexCurve section in this chapter for de...

Страница 340: ...d by a voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCT...

Страница 341: ...1 BLOCK C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Mult...

Страница 342: ...teps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Di...

Страница 343: ...0 or quadrature connection If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions such as can happen through a bus tie breaker two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle ECA settings PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SR...

Страница 344: ...o select the source for the operating and polarizing signals The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source The polar izing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle ECA PHASE DIR 1 ECA This setting is used to select th...

Страница 345: ...EUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC2 See page 5 214 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK PHASE DIR 1 ECA PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK IA No Seq ABC Seq ACB Yes VBC VCB 827078A7 CDR Off...

Страница 346: ...us and the element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately Figure 5 101 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001...

Страница 347: ...nd three phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase pure zero sequence injection Figure 5 102 NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE...

Страница 348: ...ntity EQ 5 16 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING Voltage Range Voltage C...

Страница 349: ...urrent When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX one third of this voltage is used in place of V_0 The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element The figure below shows the voltage polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault with ECA 90 element characteristic angle centerline of operating characteristic ...

Страница 350: ...ge V_X accordingly must be greater than the VOLTAGE CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu to be validated for use as a polariz ing signal If the polarizing signal is invalid neither forward nor reverse indication is given If Current polarizing is selected the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for...

Страница 351: ...g signal simulta neously IG current has to be above 0 05 ps to be used as operate quantity NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS SEQ RESTRAINT This setting controls the amount of the positive sequence restraint Set to 0 063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3 40 and older Set to zero to remove the restraint Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFF...

Страница 352: ...EUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Measured VX Voltage Calculated V_0 Current Ground Crt IG Zero Seq Crt I_0 Dual Dual V Dual I NOTE 1 CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2 GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3 POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT ...

Страница 353: ...tion is made the auxiliary channel must be identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings This element operates when the auxil iary voltage is configured as neutral WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLT Calculated VN Ran...

Страница 354: ...ing equations A value of 1 pu represents the product of a 1 pu voltage as specified in the overvolt age condition for this element and a 1 pu current as specified in the overcurrent condition for this element WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element The operating power is calculated as EQ 5 17 where indicates complex conjugate By varying the element cha...

Страница 355: ...1 MULTIPLIER This setting is applicable if WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURVE above is selected to Inverse and defines the multiplier factor for the inverse time delay FORWARD FAULT REVERSE FAULT Vn In ECA 180 to 270 Vn In ECA 0 to 90 Vn In ECA 180 Vn In ECA 0 Vn In ECA 90 to 180 Vn In ECA 270 to 360 INDUCTIVE NETWORK RESISTIVE NETWORK CAPACITIIVE NETWORK 837804A1 CDR ...

Страница 356: ...TTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLTAGE Calculated Measured SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA S V conj I exp j ECA SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PICKUP WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OV PICKUP S OP PWR PICKUP I OC PICKUP MAG WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PICKUP V OV PICKUP MAG t PKP 0 SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 1 PWR PKP DEL SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 REF PWR RUN WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 MULTIPLIER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND WATTM...

Страница 357: ...e accumulator will be cleared immediately These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled...

Страница 358: ...nversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 RESET D...

Страница 359: ... information on the negative sequence time overcurrent curves refer to the Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves section earlier NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ TOC1 See page 5 226 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC2 See page 5 226 MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC1 See page 5 227 MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC2 See page 5 227 MESSAGE NEG SEQ DIR OC1 See page 5 228 MESSAGE NEG SEQ DIR OC2 See page 5 228 SETTING GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Enabled ...

Страница 360: ...tor is cleared immediately Figure 5 109 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE IEEE Mod Inv Range see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MU...

Страница 361: ... phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase injection opposite rotation Figure 5 110 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enable...

Страница 362: ... operating quantity EQ 5 21 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative sequence and zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs Fault inception and switch off transients NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSA...

Страница 363: ...ent Table 5 31 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT UNIT Table 5 32 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL UNIT The negative sequence voltage must be greater than the VOLTAGE CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given The following fi...

Страница 364: ...rmation on how to calculate this setting In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small If this is the intent the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative sequence impedance of the protected circuit Practically it is several times smaller The offset impedance is entered in secondary ohms ...

Страница 365: ...tion this pickup threshold applies to zero or negative sequence current When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive sequence restraint technique Figure 5 112 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC 827091A7 CDR AND AND AND AND AND OR OR NOTE V_2 is negative sequence voltage I_2 is negative sequence current I_0 is zero sequence current AND SETTING Off ...

Страница 366: ...PV PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 1 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 2 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 3 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 ...

Страница 367: ...lude other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current supervised initiate is to be used The use of a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little...

Страница 368: ...aths provide two levels of current supervision high set and low set that allow the supervision level to change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion The high set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2 along with a timer that will enable the low set detector after its delay interval The d...

Страница 369: ...ly for three pole tripping schemes BF1 USE TIMER 1 If set to Yes the early path is operational BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status 1 to open from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2 If set to Yes the main path is operational BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY Timer ...

Страница 370: ...pproximately 90 of the resistor current This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed in This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breake...

Страница 371: ...rce SETTING IA IB IC SETTING RUN IC Pickup RUN IA Pickup RUN IB Pickup Initiated phase A to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Initiated to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 TRIP PHASE C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Phase Current Supervision Pickup SETTING Initiated phase B to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Страница 372: ...aker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 2 Pickup Delay SETTING AND Use Timer 3 SETTINGS Yes 1 Breaker Pos 2 Phase A 3P Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase B Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase C Off 0 Breaker Test On Off 0 AND Initiated from single pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 3 Pickup Delay SETTING AND AND OR AND OR OR SETTING Phase Current HiSet Pickup RUN IA 0 LoSet Time Delay SETTING SETTING Phase Curren...

Страница 373: ... TO SHEET 2 OF 2 Initiated TO SHEET 2 OF 2 827068 cdr BF1 FUNCTION Disable 0 Enable 1 SETTING BF1 BLOCK Off 0 SETTING BF1 INITIATE Off 0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL IN YES 1 NO 0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV YES 1 NO 0 SETTING IA IB IN IC BF1 SOURCE SETTING IA PICKUP RUN BF1 PH AMP SUPV SETTINGS PICKUP BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP RUN RUN RUN IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Страница 374: ...PICKUP SETTING AND SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING AND SETTING NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 1 SETTING BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 3 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 A 3P Φ Off 0 SETTING BF1 BREAKER TEST ON Off 0 SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING SETTINGS IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 SETTING RUN RUN IA PICKUP RUN BF1 N AMP ...

Страница 375: ...external devices by operat ing an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 See page 5 243 MESSAGE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2 See page 5 243 MESSAGE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE3 See page 5 243 MESSAGE PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 ...

Страница 376: ...pickup level for a specified period of time The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600 00 seconds in steps of 0 01 The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char acteristic The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below EQ 5 22 where T operating time D undervoltage delay setting D 0 00 operates instantaneously V secondary voltage applie...

Страница 377: ...Ground Phase to Phase MESSAGE PHASE UV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 CURVE Definite Time Range Definite Time Inverse Time MESSAGE PHASE UV1 DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE 0 100 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE UV1 TARGE...

Страница 378: ... SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic Operand MESSAGE PHASE OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MES...

Страница 379: ... this element must be configured for a phase VT VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element This function requires the VTs to be wye connected Figure 5 122 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu...

Страница 380: ...EG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 RESET DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self...

Страница 381: ...teristics The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element The element resets instantaneously The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked Figure 5 124 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL ...

Страница 382: ...orner delta VT connection Figure 5 125 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 t...

Страница 383: ...SATED OV FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE COMPENSATED OV SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE COMPENSATED OV Zc MAG 2 00 Ω Range 0 00 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE COMPENSATED OV Zc ANG 90 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE COMPENSATED OV I_1max 0 20 pu Range 0 01 to 1 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE COMPENSATED OV STG1 PICKUP 1 300 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 ...

Страница 384: ...red reach setting would be EQ 5 24 The following settings are available COMPENSATED OV Zc MAG This setting specifies the magnitude of the impedance ZC in secondary ohms This should be set to half the positive sequence series impedance of the line Alternately if the positive sequence charging currents and local and remote voltages are known then this value can be calculated from equation above COMP...

Страница 385: ...kup V_1c Pickup SETTING Stage 2 Pickup V_1c Pickup SETTING Stage 3 Pickup V_1c Pickup AND AND AND OR SETTING Stage 1 Delay T 0 SETTING Stage 2 Delay T 0 SETTING Stage 3 Delay T 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COMP OV STG3 OP COMP OV STG3 PKP COMP OV STG3 DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COMP OV STG2 OP COMP OV STG2 PKP COMP OV STG2 DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COMP OV STG1 OP COMP OV STG1 PKP COMP OV STG1 DPO OR FLEXLOGIC O...

Страница 386: ... reactive powers as measured per the UR series metering convention is a sum of the element characteristic DIR POWER 1 RCA and calibration DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION angles and SMIN is the minimum operating power The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 2 actual value The element has two independent as to the pickup and delay settings stages for a...

Страница 387: ...ented in the figure below For example section a in the figure below shows settings for reverse power while section b shows settings for low forward power applications Figure 5 130 DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS RESTRAIN SMIN RCA CALIBRATION OPERATE D i r e c t i o n Q P 842702A1 CDR P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA 0o SMIN 0 d P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA 180o SMIN 0 a P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA ...

Страница 388: ...es imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line the negative values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line Refer to the Directional power sample applications figure for details Together with the RCA this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics This setting applies to three phase power and is entered in per unit pu values The base quantity is 3...

Страница 389: ... specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE ...

Страница 390: ... delay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay respons...

Страница 391: ...ic operand MESSAGE GROUP 1 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 2 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 6 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SETTING GROUP EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled SETTINGS Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 OR SETTINGS Enabled TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Off TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND AND ...

Страница 392: ...ging when the FlexLogic parameter is set to On This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions such as the breaker being open The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which when set makes the partic ular setting group active for use by any grouped element A priority scheme ensures that only one gro...

Страница 393: ...Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE Time out Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE Res...

Страница 394: ...l not take place and an alarm will be set SELECTOR 1 STEP UP This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal The position changes incrementally wrapping up from the last SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE to the first position 1 Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms After each r...

Страница 395: ...the SELECTOR TIME OUT setting after the last activity of the three bit control inputs Note that the stepping up control input and three bit control input have independent acknowledging signals SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK accordingly SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay When set to Restore the last position of the selector stored i...

Страница 396: ...these diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 135 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Страница 397: ...up it should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make th...

Страница 398: ...llowing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 137 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR...

Страница 399: ...SAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 6 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP SEAL IN DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRIP RESET CBaux OR Custom Range Pole Curr OR Custom CBaux OR Custom Custom MESSAGE START TMR Z2PH Inp1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE START TMR Z...

Страница 400: ... pole trip can be issued Outputs from this element are also directly connected as initiate signals to the breaker failure elements At least one internal protection element or digital input representing detection of a fault must be available as an input to this element In pilot aided scheme applications a timer can be used to delay the output decision until data from a remote ter minal is received ...

Страница 401: ...mand is present TRIP SEAL IN DELAY This setting specifies the minimum time that trip command signals are maintained to provide sufficient time to open the breaker poles If a value of 0 is specified then the output signal is reset once the protection elements initiating the trip are reset If a value other than 0 is specified then the protection elements must reset and the timer initiated at the fir...

Страница 402: ...elaying tripping on internal faults that follow detection of reverse faults solves the problem As long as the operand indicated under this setting is asserted the trip action is delayed by TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS time Typically this operand should combine reverse zone indications such as zone 4 pickup with a half cycle pickup delay and two cycle dropout delay This setting should be used only in...

Страница 403: ...SELECT CG POTT TRIP 3P POTT TRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP A PUTT TRIP A HYBRID POTT TRIP A DIR BLOCK1 TRIP A DCUB TRIP A 87L TRIP OP A PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C To trip output logic sheet 2 837034 3P PHASE SELECT VOID OR POTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP B PUTT TRIP B HYBRID POTT TRIP B DIR BLOCK1 TRIP B DCUB TRIP B 87L TRIP OP B OR POTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP C PUTT TRIP C HYBRID POTT TRIP C DIR BLOCK1 TRIP C ...

Страница 404: ... Pole Curr OR Custom Custom FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OPEN POLE I A Φ OR TRIP OUTPUT OP OR OR Off Start Timer Z2Ph In2 SETTINGS Off OR Off Start Timer Z2Gr In2 Off Start Timer Z2Gr In1 From trip output logic sheet 1 837025AG AND AND Start Timer Z2Ph In1 TIMER ENABLED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND to phase distance zone 2 logic to ground distance zone 2 logic SE...

Страница 405: ...parameter below the minimum voltage current setting The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre quency element to operate This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pic...

Страница 406: ...p The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding restoration The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup Figure 5 141 OVERFR...

Страница 407: ...equence voltage Overvoltage supervision should be used to pre vent operation under specific system conditions such as faults FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element The supervising function responds to the positive sequence current Typical application includes load shedding Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent superv...

Страница 408: ... but only if the frequency is already below certain level such as for load shedding this setting should be set to the required frequency level If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT then the minimum voltage supervision is 3 V Figure 5 142 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC NOTE V_1 PICKUP FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK Off RUN FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE Pos...

Страница 409: ...the frequency difference F This time can be calculated by EQ 5 26 where phase angle difference in degrees F frequency difference in Hz SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE SRC 2 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DI...

Страница 410: ...cts the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages V1 or and V2 are below the maximum voltage threshold A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level Six options are available None Dead Source function is disabled LV1 and DV2 Live V1 and Dead V2 DV1 and LV2 Dead V1 an...

Страница 411: ...le with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxil iary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the con figuration of...

Страница 412: ...lt SETTINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AD CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPER...

Страница 413: ... Range Protection AND CB Protection Only MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR MAN CLOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS 10 00 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR 1P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR 3P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAG...

Страница 414: ...eps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR RESET TIME 60 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR PAUSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 5 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR ...

Страница 415: ...third and fourth shots are always three pole and start the AR 3 P DEAD TIME 2 4 timers 2 1 Pole In this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1 P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase If the fault is three phase or a three pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single pole initiation the scheme goes to lockout without reclosing If two or more shots are enabled the second th...

Страница 416: ...e another phase during the single pole dead time of the auto recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER Permanent Fault Consider Mode 1 which calls for 1 Pole or 3 Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3 Pole Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure and assume a permanent fault on the line Also assume the scheme is in the Reset state Fo...

Страница 417: ... an initiate signal the scheme moves into the reclose in progress state and starts the incomplete sequence timer The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires the scheme goes to Lockout There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state as shown bel...

Страница 418: ...tivated through the AR Mode Activation inputs explained as follows MODE 1 to MODE 4 ACTIVATION This setting selects an operand for activating the corresponding AR mode in run time Mode change via activation input takes place when only one of the four activation inputs is high and the AR RIP operand is low that is reclose is not in progress and also the mode to be activated is different from the ex...

Страница 419: ...This setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR 3 P DEAD TIME 4 This setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR EXTEND DEAD T 1 This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot to the possibility of non simultaneous tripping at the two line ends Typically this is the operand set when the commu...

Страница 420: ...the reclosing cycle until successful the scheme will reset or unsuccessful the scheme will go to Lock out When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 2 AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2 1 and Breaker 2 has failed to close When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred...

Страница 421: ...e logic sheet 3 OR AND AND OR SETTING Off 0 Bkr 3 Pole Open OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN from autoreclose logic sheet 3 AND OR SETTING Protection and CB AR Initiate Mode AND AND RESET from autoreclose logic sheet 2 CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 OR OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT COUNT 0 OR SETTING Off 0 Pause SHOT COUNT MAX from autoreclose logic sheet 2 SETTING Mode 2 1 Pole AR Mode Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B OR FL...

Страница 422: ... because AR Mode equals to 1 2 3 and 4 respec tively so that it can be monitored and logged FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR RIP AND Off 0 Mode 1 Off 0 Mode 2 Off 0 Mode 3 Off 0 Mode 4 Only 1 out of 4 is high AR Mode Activation SETTING SETTING AR M0DE Mode 1 1 3 Pole Mode 2 1 Pole Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B Mode to be activated a 1 4 Current AR Mode b 1 4 Switch to new mode Note only one mode can be acti...

Страница 423: ...D BREAKER 1 CLOSED SETTING Max Number of Shots 4 3 2 1 0 maximum Increment shout count Decrement shout count Reset count OR AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR SHOT CNT 4 AR SHOT CNT 3 AR SHOT CNT 2 AR SHOT CNT 1 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT CNT 0 SHOT COUNT MAX CLOSE BKR 1 OR 2 BKR FAIL TO RECLS to Lockout RESET to autoreclose logic sheet 1 ACTUAL VALUES AR SHOT COUNT 4 AR SHOT COUNT 3 AR SHOT COUNT 2 AR S...

Страница 424: ... BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 2 CLOSED BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR BKR MANUAL CLOSE To sheet 1 BKR CLOSED To sheet 1 and 2 BKR 3 POLE OPEN To sheet 1 B...

Страница 425: ...ND T PROT T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET T R I P AR RIP AR 1 P RIP AR FORCE 3P TRIP CLOSE AR CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1 T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET 3 P 2 DEAD TIME TRANSFER TIME T CLOSE BKR2 842703A4 CDR T PROT T CLOSE BKR1 RESET TIME AR RESET TIME AR SHOT COUNT 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSED AR 3P INIT AR 3P 2 RIP BREAKER 2 CLOSED AR CLOSE BKR2 AR TRANSFER TIME AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 1 P DEAD TIME 1 25 cycle ...

Страница 426: ...t delay is not required set to 0 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED When set to Disabled the operation of the pickup LED is blocked Figure 5 149 DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE DIG ELEM 1 NAME Dig Element 1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE DIG ELEM 1 I...

Страница 427: ...p oper ation is required The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared In most breaker control circuits the trip coil i...

Страница 428: ...t In this case it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off In this case the settings are as follows EnerVista UR Setup example shown Figure 5 151 TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2 The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid state contact with voltage monitoring Tr...

Страница 429: ...al to EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at...

Страница 430: ... operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen val...

Страница 431: ...KER FLASHOVER 1 See page 5 301 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 2 See page 5 301 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 See page 5 306 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 2 See page 5 306 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 1 See page 5 309 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 2 See page 5 309 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 3 See page 5 309 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 4 See page 5 309 MESSAGE OPEN POLE See page 5 311 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 See page 5 314 MES...

Страница 432: ... Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account for a non zero reset time of the overcurrent function Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1 4 menus B...

Страница 433: ...ystem 5 299 5 SETTINGS 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 153 ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT Initiate Breaker Contacts Part Arc Extinguished 100 ms Programmable Start Delay Start Integration Stop Integration Total Area Breaker Arcing Current kA cycle ...

Страница 434: ...INIT C BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP LIMIT CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 NO 0 YES 1 Enabled 1 AND AND AND AND AND OR OR 827071A4 CDR KA Cycle Limit 2 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCI...

Страница 435: ... None SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP 0 600 pu Range 0 00...

Страница 436: ...ions prior to flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 3 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this sc...

Страница 437: ... BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro vide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP This setting specifies a pi...

Страница 438: ...nds per breaker pole that supervise the operation of the element per phase Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements breaker failure and close and trip commands A six cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected ...

Страница 439: ... BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 none VB Vb IB Block OFF 0 VA PKP FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 Phase B logic Phase B logic Phase B logic Ph...

Страница 440: ...KE 1 OP operand is asserted for a short period of time The user can add coun ters and other logic to facilitate the decision making process as to the appropriate actions upon detecting a single restrike or a series of consecutive restrikes A restrike event FlexLogic operand is declared if all of the following hold The current is initially interrupted BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION ...

Страница 441: ... SOURCE This setting selects the source of the current for this element This source must have a valid CT bank assigned BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup level of the overcurrent detector in per unit values of CT nominal current BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY This setting specifies the reset delay for this element When set to 0 ms then FlexLogic operand will be picked up f...

Страница 442: ...E 1 FUNCTION SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BLK AND SETTING IA BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE IB IC SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BKR OPEN SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 OPEN CMD SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 CLS CMD AND OR SETTING BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP RUN Restrike detection logic 0 TRST SETTING BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY 0 TRST 0 TRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP A BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP B BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP C BKR RESTR...

Страница 443: ...n current can indicate a VT fuse fail conditions These noted indications of fuse failure can also be present when faults are present on the system so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure decla rations during these events is provided Once the fuse failure condition is declared it is sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to in...

Страница 444: ...05 pu SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 2 cycles 20 cycles SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIMER OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand applies to the D60 L60 and L90 Neutral Wire Open Detect SETTING Enabled 1 SOURCE 1 3V_0 3rd Harmonic SETTING Run 3V_0 3rd Harm setting 3 HARM PKP AND SRC1 3V0 3nd Harmonic FLEX ANALOG AND 5 cy...

Страница 445: ...ce of the entire line If shunt reactors are applied this value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers The value is entered in secondary ohms This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and utilized by the relay The OPEN POLE LINE XC0 setting specifies zero sequence reactance of the enti...

Страница 446: ...ole is declared only after the breaker opens and current disappears If the fault evolves into a multi phase fault before the circuit breaker pole opens for the first fault the phase selector will change the fault type from a single line to ground fault to a multi phase fault thereby initiating a three pole trip The OPEN POLE DETECTION setting selects the signals used to detect an open pole conditi...

Страница 447: ...R FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OOS OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 2 A CLSD BREAKER 2 ФB CLSD BREAKER 2 ФC CLSD OR OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 2 OOS SETTING Open Pole Rem Current Pkp RUN IA remote Pickup IB remote Pickup IC remote Pickup TIMERS 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles AND AND OR OR OR 837024AD CDR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OPEN POLE REM OP A Φ OPEN POLE REM OP B Φ OPEN POLE ...

Страница 448: ... BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX 1 50 pu Range 0 05 to 5 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 PKP DELAY 20 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDCT 1 BLK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCT 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCT 1 EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled OR 837038A2 CDR OR OR OR OR XOR FLEXLOGIC...

Страница 449: ...cifies the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current When one phase conductor is broken the I_2 I_1 ratio with a balanced remaining two phases is 50 So normally this setting should be set below 50 for example to 30 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN This setting specifies the minimum positive sequence current supervision level Ensure this setting is programmed to a sufficient level to...

Страница 450: ... SETTING Run 0 2 cyc FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BROKEN CONDUCT 1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BROKEN CONDUCT 1 PKP 832030A1 cdr I1 Ia Ib Ic I1 I1 MIN Ia I1 MIN Ib I1 MIN Ic I1 MIN Ic Ia Ia 0 05 pu Ib Ib 0 05 pu Ic Ic 0 05 pu Where I is four cycles old BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN AND AND AND OR OR AND One phase current loss detection 0 t PKP SETTING BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX SETTINGS Run BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I2 I1 RATI...

Страница 451: ...ction trip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current IB protected element base nominal current THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTION 1 SOURCE SRC1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 M...

Страница 452: ...ula EQ 5 29 In the above equation τrst thermal protection trip time constant Tmin is a minimum reset time setting Figure 5 163 IEC 255 8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle When current is greater than the pickup level In k IB element starts increasing the thermal en...

Страница 453: ...tting All calculations are performed per phase If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0 05 in all three phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 164 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 35 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME C...

Страница 454: ...S PILOT SCHEMES DUTT SCHEME PILOT SCHEMES DUTT SCHEME See page 5 320 MESSAGE PUTT SCHEME See page 5 323 MESSAGE POTT SCHEME See page 5 325 MESSAGE POTT1 SCHEME See page 5 329 MESSAGE HYBRID POTT SCHEME See page 5 331 MESSAGE BLOCKING SCHEME See page 5 335 MESSAGE BLOCKING1 SCHEME See page 5 339 MESSAGE DCUB SCHEME See page 5 341 DUTT SCHEME DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESS...

Страница 455: ... assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose DUTT SEAL IN DELAY The output FlexLogic operand DUTT OP is produced according to the DUTT scheme logic A seal in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line carrier The DUTT SEAL IN DELAY is a minimum guaranteed...

Страница 456: ...s Figure 5 165 DUTT SCHEME LOGIC SETTING SETTINGS SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION DUTT NO OF COMM BITS DUTT NO OF COMM BITS DUTT NO OF COMM BITS Enabled 1 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 PH DIST Z1 PKP DUTT RX1 DUTT RX2 DUTT RX3 DUTT RX4 DUTT TX1 DUTT TRIP A DUTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP 3P DUTT TX2 DUTT TX3 DUTT TX4 DUTT OP DUTT...

Страница 457: ...er to assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals This delay should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the zone 1 pickup The selected delay will increase the response tim...

Страница 458: ...resulting signals should be configured as the PUTT RX inputs Figure 5 166 PUTT SCHEME LOGIC SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUTT RX1 PUTT RX2 PUTT RX3 PUTT RX4 PUTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 PH DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z1 PKP PUTT OP PUTT SEAL IN DELAY PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY SETTING PUTT SCHEME BLOCK OFF 0 837013AD CDR GND DIST Z2 PKP GND D...

Страница 459: ...om MESSAGE POTT ECHO COND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE POTT RX PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY 0 020 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY 0 090 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s R...

Страница 460: ...l that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function if used to current reversal condi tions The transient blocking mechanism applies to the ground ...

Страница 461: ...ng forward looking protec tion element used as GND DIR O C FWD Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O C FWD allow ing the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the negative sequence directional overcurrent or neutral directional...

Страница 462: ...HO DURATION TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY POTT SEAL IN DELAY AND OR AND OR AND AND AND AND AND OR 0 tRST 0 tRST tPKP tPKP tPKP 0 ECHO LOCKOUT Echo duration and lockout logic SETTINGS POTT RX1 POTT RX2 POTT RX3 POTT RX4 POTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POTT NO OF COMM BITS POTT TX1 POTT TX2 POTT TX3 POTT TX4 ECHO TABLE TRANSMIT TABLE Phase Selector RX RX RUN RUN FLEXLOGI...

Страница 463: ...ge 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY 0 050 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE POTT1 SEAL IN DELAY 0 010 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE DIR FWD1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DI...

Страница 464: ...er the Negative Sequence Directional IOC or Neutral Directional IOC Both of these ele ments have separate forward FWD and reverse REV output operands The forward indication is used NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Figure 5 168 POTT1 GROUND SCHEME LOGIC SETTING SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING POTT1 SCHEME FUNCTION Enabled Custom DIR FWD1 LINE PICKUP LEO PKP Off...

Страница 465: ...GE TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY 0 020 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY 0 090 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE HYB POTT SEAL IN DELAY 0 010 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GND DIR ...

Страница 466: ...user application When used in conjunction with the trip output element the scheme is pre configured to initiate trip breaker fail and single pole autoreclose actions HYB POTT BLOCK This setting allows the user to assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO If set to Enabled the scheme sends...

Страница 467: ...rotection element used as GND DIR O C FWD Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of var ious protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the negative sequence directional or neutral directional overcurrent elements Both these ...

Страница 468: ...2 PKP PH DIST Z4 PKP PH DIST Z1 PKP LINE PICKUP LEO PKP OPEN POLE OP LINE PICKUP UV PKP HYB POTT OP Disabled 0 Off 0 Off GND DIR O C FWD HYB POTT WEAK INFEED HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO HYB POTT W I COND GND DIR O C REV HYB POTT RX1 HYB POTT RX2 HYB POTT RX3 HYB POTT RX4 HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS HYB POTT ECHO COND GND DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP OR OR OR OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND E...

Страница 469: ... and set per rules of distance relaying If used by this scheme the selected ground directional overcurrent functions must be enabled config ured and programmed accordingly In single pole tripping applications the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the phase selector together with information received from the remote terminal BLOCKING SCHEME BLOCKING SCHEME FUNCTION Disabled Ra...

Страница 470: ...e into account the pickup time of the reverse looking elements of the scheme The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a spurious reverse fault indication that can occur during internal fault conditions TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the blocking scheme for coping with the exposure of the overreac...

Страница 471: ...ommunications channel avail able for the scheme With only one bit available the scheme sends the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX INIT FlexLogic operand This operand should be used to start the channel set the blocking signal On internal faults the scheme removes the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX1 FlexLogic operand For tripping the scheme responds to lack of the blocki...

Страница 472: ...LOCKING SCHEME RX3 BLOCKING SCHEME RX4 BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS GND DIR O C REV 837016AG CDR GND DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP OR OR OR OR OR AND AND AND tPKP tPKP 0 0 tRST tRST Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP DIR BLOCK TX3 STOP DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP TRANSMIT TABLE RX RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BLO...

Страница 473: ... MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR FWD1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR FWD2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR FWD3 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR REV1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR REV2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 SCHME DIR REV3 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BLK1 FORCE TX STOP1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE...

Страница 474: ... operand can be used as BLK1 SCHME DIR REV enabling the user to combine responses of vari ous protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations BLK1 SCHME DIR REV entries are primarily meant to be the output operand from the Negative Sequence Directional REV IOC Neutral Directional REV IOC non directional IOC or reverse looking distance elements Coordinate the selected p...

Страница 475: ...SSAGE GND DIR O C REV Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY 0 020 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY 0 090 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY 0 050 s Range 0 to 65 5...

Страница 476: ...al s The directional comparison unblocking scheme was devel oped for use with frequency shift keying communications channels though different telecommunications interfaces can be used for example digital communication channels utilizing the D60 teleprotection input outputs To make the scheme fully operational as a stand alone feature the scheme output operands must be configured to inter face with...

Страница 477: ...erse directional element is recommended TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the directional comparison unblocking scheme for coping with the exposure of both the over reaching zone 2 and ground directional overcurrent function to current reversal conditions The transient blocking logic applies to both operate trip and send transmit paths Identif...

Страница 478: ...ement This timer seals in when it expires creating a blocking signal for all scheme functions and disabling the scheme until the guard signal is restored and the GUARD HEALTHY RESET DELAY timer expires Typical values for this setting are from 160 to 180 ms for most cases a setting of about 150 ms may be used DCUB SEAL IN DELAY The output FlexLogic operand DCUB OP is produced according to the direc...

Страница 479: ...N DELAY 0 t RST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB NO OF COMM BITS RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB TRIP A DCUB TRIP B DCUB TRIP C DCUB TRIP 3P Phase Selector RX TRANSMIT TABLE DCUB NO OF COMM BITS RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB TX1 DCUB TX2 DCUB TX3 DCUB TX4 ECHO TABLE RUN DCUB OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector RX Off 0...

Страница 480: ...r a user settable debounce time in order for the D60 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence t...

Страница 481: ...to filter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 173 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detec...

Страница 482: ...output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internall...

Страница 483: ...ent damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is pr...

Страница 484: ...ng specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs that is when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied With both control inputs applied simultaneously the contact will close if set to Operate dominant and will open if set to Reset dominant Application Example 1 A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user programmable pushbuttons buttons number 1 and 2 Th...

Страница 485: ...nerVista UR Setup example shown Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu assuming an H4L module OUTPUT H1a OPERATE VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET VO2 5 8 4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 96 There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic If not assigned t...

Страница 486: ...ication includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices Each transmitting device will send a GSSE GOOSE message upon a successful power up when the state of any included point changes or after a specified interval the default update time if a change of state has not occurred The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is se...

Страница 487: ...ugh UserSt 32 and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32 The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE GOOSE message A user must program a DNA point from the approp...

Страница 488: ...e remote double point status input REM DPS IN 1 DEV This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote Devices section REM DPS IN 1 ITEM This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double point status item from a ...

Страница 489: ...ate LED event indicators and the target message on the display Once set the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches not including FlexLogic latches to the reset state The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button a remote device via a ...

Страница 490: ...first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 1 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest Off freezes the input in case of lost communications If the latest state is not known such as after relay power up but before the first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 0 When communication resumes the inp...

Страница 491: ...g signal from downstream devices say 2 3 and 4 to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar as shown in the figure below Figure 5 176 SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2 3 and 4 to block Device 1 If not blocked Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time ...

Страница 492: ...he architecture shown below The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission Figure 5 178 SINGLE CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly Therefore Device 2 must act as a bridge The fol lowing settings should be applied UR IED 1 DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER 2 t...

Страница 493: ... FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel This allows the user to create distributed protec tion and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality The teleprotection function mus...

Страница 494: ...s outputs is dependent on the number of com munication channels and terminals On two terminal two channel systems they are processed continuously on each chan nel and mapped separately per channel Therefore to achieve redundancy the user must assign the same operand on both channels teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end On three termi...

Страница 495: ...point values with no units The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to configure GOOSE Analog so that it can be used in a FlexElement GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG 1 DEFAULT 1000 000 Range 1000000 000 to 1000000 000 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE Default Value Range Default Value Last Known MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS Range up to 4 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GOOSE AN...

Страница 496: ...ger input UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value This setting is stored as a 32 bit unsigned integer number UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known the value of the GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received val...

Страница 497: ... are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with th...

Страница 498: ...are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the channe...

Страница 499: ... 50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160 320 161 04 259 ...

Страница 500: ... menu an exam ple for channel M5 is shown The relay checks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 32 where x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RA...

Страница 501: ...system measured via UR series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the DCmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA The following settings are applied on the relay CT ratio 1200 5 VT secondary 115 VT connection is delta and VT ratio 120 The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0 90 The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20 over...

Страница 502: ...ed are EQ 5 41 The base unit for voltage refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details is EQ 5 42 The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 43 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE SRC 2 V_1 mag DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL 0 404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL 0 635 pu The limit settings differ from...

Страница 503: ...ions based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the D60 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay ...

Страница 504: ...ge across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis abled Open o...

Страница 505: ...and 3 should open and contact input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully opera tional The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled an...

Страница 506: ...01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC TEST ANGLE 120 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST ANGLE 0 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST MAGNITUDE 1 000 kA Range 0 000 to 9 999 kA in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST ANGLE 10 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE P...

Страница 507: ... in the outgoing data frames When required it is recommended to use the user pro grammable digital channels to signal the IEEE C37 118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measure ments The UR Synchrophasor Implementation defines a test mode which sends a pre defined set of Synchrophasors out over the communication channel when the test mode function setting is enabled In te...

Страница 508: ...5 374 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 5 10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS 5 ...

Страница 509: ...5 CONTACT OUTPUTS See page 6 5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 6 AUTORECLOSE See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 7 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 7 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 7 FLEX STATES See page 6 8 ETHERNET See page 6 8 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING See page 6 8 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6 9 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS See page 6 10 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS S...

Страница 510: ...ENCY RATE OF CHANGE See page 6 20 FLEXELEMENTS See page 6 21 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 6 21 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 See page 6 22 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 2 See page 6 22 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT See page 6 22 PMU AGGREGATOR See page 6 23 TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 6 23 TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS See page 6 23 DISTANCE See page 6 24 ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS See page 6 26 ...

Страница 511: ...D60 Line Distance Protection System 6 3 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 PMU RECORDS See page 6 27 MAINTENANCE See page 6 28 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION See page 6 29 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6 29 ...

Страница 512: ...icates the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been estab...

Страница 513: ...here The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output For example Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAGE REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MES...

Страница 514: ... for that output 6 2 8 AUTORECLOSE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here 6 2 9 REMOTE DEVICES a STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online If the corresponding state is N...

Страница 515: ...AL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 8 The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here The status of each counter with the user defined counter name includes the accumulated and frozen counts the count units label will also appear Also included is the date and time stamp for the frozen count The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp 6 2 11 SELE...

Страница 516: ... zero The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be globally unique so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster capable clocks FLEX STATES PARAM 1 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 2 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 256 Off Off Range Off On ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK MESSAGE ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail O...

Страница 517: ...ATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input output ring configuration this value is not applicable for non ring configurations This is a rolling average calculated for the last ten messages There are two return times for dual channel communications modules The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values o...

Страница 518: ...nu The GGIO5 integer data values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices 6 2 18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS The status information for two channels is shown here DIRECT DEVICES STATUS DIRECT DEVICE 1 STATUS Offline Range Offline Online MESSAGE DIRECT DEVICE 2 STATUS Offline Range Offline Online MESSAGE DIRECT DEVICE 16 STATUS O...

Страница 519: ... TCP connections still available for each protocol The display depends on the options applicable to your device for example the PMU entry does not display when not applicable Each time a con nection is used the remaining number of connections decrements When released the remaining number of connections increments If no connection is made over the specific protocol the number equals the maximum num...

Страница 520: ...Port B TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error bad port code frame length too short MISMATCHES PORT A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in the frame do not match MISMATCHES PORT B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in...

Страница 521: ...itive PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 Q...

Страница 522: ... not measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate vol...

Страница 523: ...ustrated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3 ...

Страница 524: ...NG PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE POWER SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE ENERGY SRC 1 See page 6 19 MESSAGE FREQUENCY SRC 1 See page 6 19 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ia 0 000 b 0 000 c 0 000 A ...

Страница 525: ... source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ I1 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ig 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ig 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Igd 0 000 A 0 0 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vag 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Vbg 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC ...

Страница 526: ... SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vx 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vx 0 000 V 0 0 POWER SRC 1 SRC 1 REAL POWER 3 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER a 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER b 0 000...

Страница 527: ...EQUENCY The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was pro grammed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software implemented zero crossing detection of an AC signal The signal is either a Clarke transformation of three phase voltages or currents auxiliary voltage...

Страница 528: ...ES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY The tracking frequency is displayed here The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM menu See the Power System section of chapter 5 for details 6 3 6 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE The metered frequency ra...

Страница 529: ...0 RTDs BASE 100 C SOURCE CURRENT IBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SOURCE ENERGY Positive and Negative Watthours Positive and Negative Varhours EBASE 10000 MWh or MVAh respectively SOURCE POWER PBASE maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE ma...

Страница 530: ...ETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATT GND FLT 1 0 000 W PMU 1 PMU 1 VA 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VB 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VC 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VX 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V1 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V2 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V0 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Substituted...

Страница 531: ... include the Ethernet UDP or IP layers PDU sizes approaching approximately 1500 bytes result in fragmented data frames causing increased network traffic 6 3 12 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as...

Страница 532: ...OOP IMPEDANCE ZBC 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE BC LOOP IMPEDANCE ANGLE 0 00 DEG MESSAGE CA LOOP RESISTANCE RCA 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE CA LOOP REACTANCE XCA 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE CA LOOP IMPEDANCE ZCA 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE CA LOOP IMPEDANCE ANGLE 0 00 DEG MESSAGE AG LOOP RESISTANCE RAG 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE AG LOOP REACTANCE XAG 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE AG LOOP IMPEDANCE ZAG 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE AG LOOP IMPEDANCE ANGLE 0 00 DEG MESSAGE...

Страница 533: ...is the zero sequence impedance to positive sequence impedance ratio and Z0M Z1 is mutual zero sequence imped ance to positive sequence impedance ratio both are settings taken from the first enabled ground distance zone count from zone 1 to zone 5 ZAG ZBG ZCG are calculated only if at least one ground distance zone is enabled otherwise all the metering quantities for ground distance impedance ZAG Z...

Страница 534: ...last 1024 events listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest If all 1024 event records have been filled the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added Each event record shows the event identifier sequence number cause and date time stamp associated with the event trigger Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records NO FAULTS TO REPORT or FAULT REPORT...

Страница 535: ...e log gets full at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken It counts up at the defined sampling rate If the data logger channels are defined then both values are static Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records 6 4 5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS PATH ACTUAL VALUES...

Страница 536: ...G TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open PMU 1 RECORDING PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER Yes Range No Yes MESSAGE PUM 1 AVAILABLE RECORDS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PUM 1 SECONDS PER RECORD 0 0 Range 0 to 6553 5 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PUM 1 LAST CLEARED 2013 07 14 15 40 16 Range date and time in format shown BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP A 0 00 k...

Страница 537: ...AC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE PMU FEATURE ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE CT VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETTING CHANGE 1970 01 01 23 11 19 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS FIRMWARE REVISIONS D60 Line Relay REVISION 7 2x Range 0 00 to 655 35 Revision number of the app...

Страница 538: ...6 30 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 6 5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ...

Страница 539: ...2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS MESSAGE COMMANDS SET DATE A...

Страница 540: ...When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP IRIG B or SNTP the manually entered time is over written The timescale of the entered time is local time including daylight savings time where and when applicable COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Yes CLEAR DATA LOGGER No Range No Yes C...

Страница 541: ...role can initiate the Reboot Relay command The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific D60 service actions Presently there is only one service action avail able Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non volatile memory If a code other than 101 is entered the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken Various self checking diagnostics are performed in ...

Страница 542: ...shot time The PMU ONE SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one shot operation is pending that is the present time is before the scheduled one shot time The PMU ONE SHOT OP operand indicates the one shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards When the function is disabled all three operands are de asserted The one shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given D60 relay F...

Страница 543: ...ey are referenced to different time scales Figure 7 2 USING THE PMU ONE SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC The one shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network Two or more PMU can be pre scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time When frozen the measurements could be collecte...

Страница 544: ...nformation will be included if applicable If a tar get message status changes the status with the highest priority will be displayed If a self test error is detected a message appears indicating the cause of the error For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed 7 2 3 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagn...

Страница 545: ...code stored in the D60 How often the test is performed On power up Afterwards the backplane is checked for missing cards every five sec onds What to do Check all modules against the order code ensure they are inserted properly and cycle control power If the problem persists contact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is ...

Страница 546: ...0 The EnerVista UR Setup software will list the valid items An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the D60 Latched target message Yes Description of problem The battery is not functioning How often the test is performed The battery is monitored every five seconds The error message displays after 60 sec onds if the problem persists What to do Replace the battery as outlined...

Страница 547: ...compliant The network is delivering PTP messages to the relay Latched target message No Description of problem An Ethernet connection has failed How often the test is performed Monitored every five seconds What to do Check Ethernet connections Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port Latched target message No Description of problem The SNTP server is not responding How often the...

Страница 548: ...st is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check GOOSE setup Latched target message Yes Description of problem The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature 80 C How often the test is performed Every hour What to do Remove the D60 from service and install in a ...

Страница 549: ...arget is activated HARDFIBER SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES In addition to those provided by the standard UR series devices the UR devices implement HardFiber self tests These are listed below Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self test message so troubleshooting is described here For other relays such at the B95Plus see that product ...

Страница 550: ... single origin Process Bus Trouble Minor Self Test Description Communications problems with one or more Bricks The text of the message identifies the affected field units This self test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end and by the sustained failure to receive poll responses from the proper Brick Severity This self test error does not directly inhibi...

Страница 551: ...yed operation after the memory expires Con sequently zone 1 is recommended as an underreaching element and zones 2 through 5 are recommended as overreach ing elements and for time delayed tripping The relay uses offset ground directional overcurrent functions as an optional supplement of the ground distance protection for pilot aided schemes The elements are described in more details in the Ground...

Страница 552: ...ristic impedance 1 DIR RCA ZR right blinder characteristic impedance ZR RGT BLD sin RGT BLD RCA 1 RGT BLD RCA 90 ZL left blinder characteristic impedance ZL LFT BLD sin LFT BLD RCA 1 LFT BLD RCA 90 K0 zero sequence compensating factor K0 Z0 Z1 MAG Z0 Z1 ANG 1 K0M mutual zero sequence compensating factor K0M 1 3 x Z0M Z1 MAG Z0M Z1 ANG non homogeneity angle setting NON HOMOGEN ANG b DIRECTIONAL MHO...

Страница 553: ...CA phase element IC IA Z VC VA and IC IA Z A ground element IA Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VA and I_0 Z B ground element IB Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VB and I_0 Z C ground element IC Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VC and I_0 Z If the mho characteristic is selected the limit angle of the comparator is adjustable concurrently with the limit angle of the mho characteristic resulting in a tent shape complementing the lens cha...

Страница 554: ... _1M BC phase element IB IC ZD and VB VC _1M CA phase element IC IA ZD and VC VA _1M A ground element I_0 ZD and VA_1M IA_2 ZD and VA_1M B ground element I_0 ZD and VB_1M IB_2 ZD and VB_1M C ground element I_0 ZD and VC_1M IC_2 ZD and VC_1M The characteristic and limit angles of the directional comparator are adjustable independently from the mho and reactance comparators The directional character...

Страница 555: ...ERVISION The overcurrent supervision responds to the following currents AB phase element IA IB BC phase element IB IC CA phase element IC IA A B C ground element 3 I_0 0 05 I_1 The following tables summarize the characteristics of the distance elements Table 8 1 DIRECTIONAL MHO PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE Variable mho I Z V V_1M COMP LIMIT Reactance I Z V ...

Страница 556: ...STANCE FUNCTIONS CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE Reactance I Z V j I_0 ej or j I_2 ej COMP LIMIT Directional I_0 ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT Directional I_2 ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT removed when 3I_0 OC SUPV and I_2 CUTOFF Right Blinder I ZR V I ZR 90 Left Blinder I ZL V I ZL 90 Fault type I_0 I_2 50 removed during open pole conditions or when 3I_0 OC SUPV and I_2 CUTOFF Zero sequence I_0 ZD...

Страница 557: ...nts are from the protected line and are not affected by any compensation as the latter applies only to the reach defining comparators the mho reac tance and blinder characteristics 8 1 5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS a DESCRIPTION This subsection shows how to analyze the operation of the distance elements in steady states using the results of short cir cuit studies All quantities are secondary ohms v...

Страница 558: ...ting the relay calculates K0 3 58 15 2 K0M 0 Z 14 00 88 ZD 1 88 ZR 9 99 2 ZL 4 99 178 For the assumed steady state injection the relay calculates VA_1 58 83 V 2 1 VA_1M 64 71 V 0 0 I_0 1 37 A 68 2 IA_2 1 37 A 68 1 V_0 29 18 V 8 4 VA VB _1 93 35 V 32 0 VA VB _1M 112 08 V 30 0 IA IB 7 39 A 109 1 b MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES IA Z I_0 K0 Z IA K0M Z VA 103 33 V 3 9 VA_1M 64 71 ...

Страница 559: ...ce angle 19 8 19 8 0 0 50 All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied The Zone 1 MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault Zero sequence directional difference angle for zones 2 and higher phase A 19 8 8 4 11 4 90 Zones 2 and hihger phase A ground elements will pick up time out and operate d MHO AB PHASE ELEMENT IA IB Z VA VB 88 65 V 78 7 VA VB _1M 112 08 V 30 0...

Страница 560: ...fference angle 3 9 24 8 28 7 75 Zero sequence difference angle 19 8 0 0 19 8 75 Negative sequence directional difference angle 19 8 0 0 19 8 75 Right blinder difference angle 93 0 109 2 16 2 90 Left blinder difference angle 82 9 108 7 25 8 90 Fault type comparator difference angle 19 8 19 8 0 0 50 All six comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied The Quad Phase A ground element wil...

Страница 561: ... location of the VTs and CTs with respect to the involved power transformer and the direction of any given zone In the following equations the VT and CT locations are referenced as None if the transformer is not present between the CT VT and the intended reach point Otherwise the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the VT CT position towards the intended reach point ...

Страница 562: ...A IA IB VAB IB IC VBC IC IA VCA 3IA 1 3 VAB VCA 3IB 1 3 VBC VAB 3IC 1 3 VCA VBC IAB_21P 3IC VAB_21P 1 3 VBC VCA IBC_21P 3IA VBC_21P 1 3 VCA VAB ICA_21P 3IB VCA_21P 1 3 VAB VBC IAB_21P 3IB VAB_21P 1 3 VBC VAB IBC_21P 3IC VBC_21P 1 3 VCA VBC ICA_21P 3IA VCA_21P 1 3 VAB VCA IAB_21P 3IA VAB_21P 1 3 VCA VAB IBC_21P 3IB VBC_21P 1 3 VAB VBC ICA_21P 3IC VCA_21P 1 3 VBC VCA IAB_21P 3IC VAB_21P 1 3 VCA VBC ...

Страница 563: ...A IBC_21P 1 3 2IB IA IC VBC_21P 3VB ICA_21P 1 3 2IC IA IB VCA_21P 3VC IAB_21P 1 3 IA IB 2IC VAB_21P 3VC IBC_21P 1 3 IB IC 2IA VBC_21P 3VA ICA_21P 1 3 IA IC 2IB VCA_21P 3VB IAB_21P 1 3 2IB IA IC VAB_21P 3VB IBC_21P 1 3 2IC IA IB VBC_21P 3VC ICA_21P 1 3 2IA IB IC VCA_21P 3VA IAB_21P 1 3 IB IC 2IA VAB_21P 3VA IBC_21P 1 3 IA IC 2IB VBC_21P 3VB ICA_21P 1 3 IA IB 2IC VCA_21P 3VC IAB_21P 1 3 2IC IA IB VA...

Страница 564: ...information on set tings please refer to Chapter 9 Application of Settings 8 2 2 EXAMPLE Consider the system shown below Figure 8 5 SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Normally in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X The relay input signals at this location are shown in the following table If installed at the location X the relay would...

Страница 565: ...secondary side The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers When installed at X the relay shall be set to 0 687 85 secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure When installed at H the relay shall be set to 2 569 88 4 to ensure exactly same coverage See Chapter 9 Application of Settings for more information on setting calcul...

Страница 566: ...ion for both forward and reverse faults The same principle applies to the neutral directional overcurrent element 8 3 2 EXAMPLE Consider relay input signals as in the Distance Elements Analysis section and assume an offset impedance of 4 and ECA and limit angles of 88 and 90 respectively The relay calculates the following negative sequence quantities V_2 6 39 V 159 6 I_2 1 37 A 68 1 I_1 2 94 A 144...

Страница 567: ...60 Line Distance Protection System 8 17 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT 8 I_op I_2 I_1 8 1 003 A 0 25 A The overcurrent unit will pickup and the element will operate in the forward direction ...

Страница 568: ...ecked prior to declaring a forward fault On close in forward faults beyond the series capacitors as seen from the relaying point the current inversion phenomenon may take place for a short period of time The condition cannot sustain for a long time as very high fault currents would occur causing large voltage drops across the series capacitors and prompting the overvoltage protection of the capaci...

Страница 569: ...onds to this internal fault Traditional approach would leave this fault out of the relay reach The neutral and negative sequence directional protection functions of the relay cope with the voltage and or current inver sions by adding appropriate offset to their polarizing signals as explained in the Ground Directional Overcurrent section The offset impedance can always be successfully selected to ...

Страница 570: ... V Impedance Trajectory The reach is safely reduced a Steady state apparent impedance R X FAR END BUSBAR M O V S C RF Impedance Trajectory no subsynchronous oscillations The reach is not reduced Set reach b Steady state apparent impedance R X FAR END BUSBAR M O V S C RF Impedance Trajectory no subsynchronous oscillations The reach is not reduced Set reach c Set reach LOW CURRENT EXTERNAL FAULT HIG...

Страница 571: ... for fault identification Figure 8 9 SINGLE POLE OPERATION The trip output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation which it then pro cesses to generate outputs that are used to Determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed Initiate tripping of breaker poles A B and C either individually or as a group Initiate breaker fail...

Страница 572: ...on the line the line pickup element is disarmed As the local line breaker has not tripped the operator closes the breaker at the remote end of the line placing the line in service Several scenarios are considered below b SLG FAULT An AG fault occurs close to the considered relay Immediately after the fault the disturbance detector 50DD picks up and activates the phase selector The phase selector r...

Страница 573: ...e pole trip The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip except the autorecloser will go to lock out upon the next initiation depending on the number of shots programmed c SLG FAULT EVOLVING INTO LLG When an AG fault occurs the events unfold initially as in the previous example If the fault evolves quickly the phase selec tor will change its initial assessme...

Страница 574: ...e current based algo rithm for example phase angles between the zero sequence negative sequence and positive sequence voltages are used The pre fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations The pre fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the disturbance detector 50DD operates When an open pole is declared the phase selector resets all its outputs operands and ignores ...

Страница 575: ...ECT CG Asserted when a phase C to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT AB Asserted when a phase A to B fault is detected PHASE SELECT BC Asserted when a phase B to C fault is detected PHASE SELECT CA Asserted when a phase C to A fault is detected PHASE SELECT ABG Asserted when a phase A to B to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT BCG Asserted when a phase B to C to ground fault is detected PHAS...

Страница 576: ...e operation can occur in a cross coun try fault condition Using four bit channels the relays share enough information about fault types seen from all the line ter minals that local fault selector data can be rejected In addition in multiple bit systems the relays do not respond to non valid bit combinations making the protection system more immune to communication problems than in a single bit sys...

Страница 577: ...E DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TRIP OUTPUT RX1 0 Any AG Fault Trip Phase A 0 Any BG Fault Trip Phase B 0 Any CG Fault Trip Phase C 0 Any AB ABG BC BCG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized Trip Three Phases Table 8 16 UNBLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1 BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAUL...

Страница 578: ...se B 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P Unrecognized BG 1 0 AG BC BCG BG 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P Unrecognized CG BC BCG CA CAG Trip Phase C 1 0 AG BC BCG CG 0 1 BG CA CAG CG 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P Unrecognized AB ABG 3P Unrecognized Trip Three Phases 1 0 AG BC BCG BC BCG Unrecognized 0 1 BG CA CAG CA CAG Unrecognized Table 8 21 BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 2 BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETE...

Страница 579: ... A 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG AG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P unrecognized AG 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG BG AB ABG BC BCG 3P DCUB TRIP B 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P unrecognized BG 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 AG BC BCG BG 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 AG BC BCG CG DCUB TRIP C 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG CG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P unrecognized CG BC BCG CA CAG 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 ...

Страница 580: ...Unrecognized 0 0 0 1 Table 8 24 BLOCKING SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 4 BIT CHANNELS PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED FLEXLOGIC OPRERANDS ASSERTED TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX1 STOP TX2 STOP TX3 STOP TX4 STOP AG 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 BG 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 CG 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 AB ABG BC BCG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Table 8 25 UNBLOCKING SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 4 BIT CHANNE...

Страница 581: ...G 1 0 0 0 AG BC BCG Trip Three Phases 0 1 0 0 BG CA CAG 0 0 1 0 CG AB ABG 0 0 0 1 MULTI P Unrecognized Table 8 27 BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR FOUR BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TRIP OUTPUT RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 0 0 0 0 Any while the INIT signal was not established Trip as for single bit channel 1 1 1 0 MUL...

Страница 582: ...1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG AG AB ABG CA CAG 3P unrecognized 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 BG AG AB ABG CA CAG 3P unrecognized DCUB TRIP B 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG BG 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 CG 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 MULTI P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 CG CG BC BCG CA CAG 3P unrecognized DCUB TRIP C 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG CG 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 BG 0 ...

Страница 583: ...ve signal back to the originating terminal if the line end open condition is recognized by the line pickup scheme and the fault is not identified as a reverse fault by the zone 4 or the ground directional overcurrent function if used The permissive echo is programmed as a one shot logic The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period The duration of the echo puls...

Страница 584: ...orward looking either underreaching or overreaching distance zone A given Pilot Scheme analyzes this zone for fault type identi fication if the Phase Selector asserts its Void flag the DUTT scheme uses Z1 all the other schemes use Z2 The schemes analyze all six fault loops of the zone to determine the fault type For example simultaneous forward AG and reverse BG faults may result in the Void indic...

Страница 585: ...wing protection elements will pickup Ground Distance Zone 1 2 and 3 for an AG fault At T2 the phase selector will determine the fault is type AG The reverse BG fault is likely to be ignored If a one bit channel is used terminal T1 will trip three poles but terminal T2 will trip phase A only see the Tables below which is undesirable If a two bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A only...

Страница 586: ...to fault Z positive sequence impedance of the line The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault F and pre fault load pre components EQ 8 8 and neglecting shunt parameters of the line EQ 8 9 Inserting the IA and IB equations into the VA equation and solving for the fault resistance yields EQ 8 10 Assuming the fault components of the currents IAF and IBF are in ph...

Страница 587: ...EPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is V0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supplied neutral voltage EQ 8 19 If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is I0 and the VTs are co...

Страница 588: ... SRC 50DD OP X VA or VAB VC or VCA VB or VBC 827094A5 CDR Off 0 AND FAULT LOCATOR 1 RUN 0 3 SEC ACTUAL VALUES DATE TIME FAULT TYPE FAULT LOCATION FAULT RECLOSE SHOT FAULT REPORT Vn or V_0 FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH UNITS FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG FAULT REP 1 S...

Страница 589: ...values fast fault clearance times may be seen as extremely important both from system stability and from equipment damage viewpoints The high set overcurrent element when set appropriately can be extremely useful in achieving these goals It helps the setting calculations if the system impedances are reasonably well known The overcurrent pick up should be set to the greater of the following values ...

Страница 590: ...r detecting fuse fail conditions and blocking the distance elements to using it and accepting the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed To be fully operational the Fuse Failure element must be enabled and its output FlexLogic operand must be indi cated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements For convenien...

Страница 591: ...look ing protection The fifth distance zone can be used as an alarm zone indicating that load impedance is approaching the zone characteristic 9 2 2 GROUND DISTANCE a NEUTRAL CURRENT SUPERVISION The current supervision for the ground distance elements responds to an internally calculated neutral current 3 I_0 The setting for this element should be based on twice the zero sequence line capacitance ...

Страница 592: ...compromise choice is made or different settings are applied via switchable setting groups depending on system conditions In highly non homogenous and dynamic systems where the correction for non homogeneity is not feasible conservative reach reduced and or correction angle negative settings should be considered c GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 The zone 1 reach must be set so that nominally instantaneous o...

Страница 593: ...ther contribution to a remote backup philosophy the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the remote bus The time delay must coordinate with other time delayed protections on the next line The use of a lens characteristic or load encroachment element may be advantageous if load limits are a problem To avoid extremely large reach settings the D60 has the ability to implemen...

Страница 594: ...l must be transmitted in a potentially noisy situation due to the fault The scheme output operand DUTT OP must be configured to interface with other relay functions output contacts in par ticular in order to make the scheme fully operational Typically the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip breaker fail and auto reclose and drive a user programmable LED as per user application 9...

Страница 595: ...uilt into their design as part of the technique used to improve ground fault directionality Unlike the distance protection elements the ground directional overcurrent functions do not have their reach well defined therefore the current reversal logic is incorporated for the extra signal supplementing Zone 2 in the scheme The transient blocking approach for this POTT scheme is to recognize that a p...

Страница 596: ...on with the Zone 4 distance element for better time and sensitivity coordination For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled configured and set per rules of distance relaying If used by this scheme the selected ground directional overcurrent function s must be enabled configured and set accord ingly The scheme generates output operands BLO...

Страница 597: ...ervises all scheme functions All timers are fully adjustable with typical values indicated Lockout of the directional comparison unblocking scheme is established as follows Lockout of the scheme is started for a time duration set by DCUB LOG TRIP WINDOW setting if The scheme is enabled and not blocked that is the scheme is active and no permissive RX signal is received and any loss of guard signal...

Страница 598: ...d directional forward function if configured and the reverse zone 4 distance elements or ground directional reverse function if configured did not pickup to set the transient blocking If these conditions are met then the scheme will key the channel s by means of asserting transmit signals DCUB TX1 through DCUB TX4 with the aid of the local phase selector or zone 2 distance elements e KEYING OF THE...

Страница 599: ...the reach setting of an underreaching distance function shall be set based on the net inductive impedance between the potential source of the relay and the far end busbar or location for which the zone must not overreach Faults behind series capacitors on the protected and adjacent lines need to be considered for this purpose For further illustration a sample system shown in the figure below is co...

Страница 600: ...t Otherwise the offset impedance shall be at least the net capacitive reactance 2 The offset cannot be higher than the net inductive reactance between the potential source and the remote equivalent system For simplicity and extra security the far end busbar may be used rather than the remote equivalent system As the ground directional functions are meant to provide maximum fault resistance coverag...

Страница 601: ... the transformer is located between the VTs and the intended reach point If this is the case the VT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the VTs toward the reach point Otherwise the VT connection setting shall be set to None 5 The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs as we...

Страница 602: ...ETTING IN APPLICATION B As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 4 the reach impedance must include the positive sequence impedance of the transformer The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer thus transformer ratio must be included EQ 9 7 9 5 2 EXAMPLE Given the following for the system shown in the previous section ZX 30 85 intended r...

Страница 603: ...mb screw has been removed as shown below This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal The new wide angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the D60 Figure 10 1 UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ENHANCED FACEPLATE The standard faceplate can be opened to the left once the sliding latch on the right side has been p...

Страница 604: ...ce the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis engage the clips simultaneously When the clips have locked into position the module will be fully inserted CPU connections must be individually disconnected from the module before the module can be removed from the chassis The new CT VT modules can only be used with new CPUs similarly old CT VT modules can only be used with old CPUs In the e...

Страница 605: ...screwing the panel enhanced front panel 4 For the standard front panel it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module which is typically in the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply mo...

Страница 606: ... side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply module and remove the module 6 Unscrew all four screws not three that attach the metal cover to the module 7 Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 1 cm 1 4 inch and remove the c...

Страница 607: ...μια μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον ...

Страница 608: ...eri Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen Se produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å indikere at kadmium Cd bly Pb eller kvikksølv Hg forekommer Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gje...

Страница 609: ...ör avsedd deponering För mer information se www recyclethis info TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş topla...

Страница 610: ...10 8 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin 10 2 BATTERIES 10 MAINTENANCE 10 ...

Страница 611: ...ue 6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS Amps Source 1 phase A current RMS 6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS Amps Source 1 phase B current RMS 6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS Amps Source 1 phase C current RMS 6150 SRC 1 In RMS Amps Source 1 neutral current RMS 6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag Amps Source 1 phase A current magnitude 6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle Degrees Source 1 phase A current angle 6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag Amps Source 1 phase B current magnitude 6157 SRC 1 Ib ...

Страница 612: ... ground current angle 6272 SRC 3 Ia RMS Amps Source 3 phase A current RMS 6274 SRC 3 Ib RMS Amps Source 3 phase B current RMS 6276 SRC 3 Ic RMS Amps Source 3 phase C current RMS 6278 SRC 3 In RMS Amps Source 3 neutral current RMS 6280 SRC 3 Ia Mag Amps Source 3 phase A current magnitude 6282 SRC 3 Ia Angle Degrees Source 3 phase A current angle 6283 SRC 3 Ib Mag Amps Source 3 phase B current magni...

Страница 613: ...tage RMS 6658 SRC 1 Vbg RMS Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS 6660 SRC 1 Vcg RMS Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS 6662 SRC 1 Vag Mag Volts Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude 6664 SRC 1 Vag Angle Degrees Source 1 phase AG voltage angle 6665 SRC 1 Vbg Mag Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude 6667 SRC 1 Vbg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase BG voltage angle 6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag Volts Source 1 pha...

Страница 614: ... V_0 Mag Volts Source 2 zero sequence voltage magnitude 6757 SRC 2 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 2 zero sequence voltage angle 6758 SRC 2 V_1 Mag Volts Source 2 positive sequence voltage magnitude 6760 SRC 2 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 2 positive sequence voltage angle 6761 SRC 2 V_2 Mag Volts Source 2 negative sequence voltage magnitude 6763 SRC 2 V_2 Angle Degrees Source 2 negative sequence voltage angl...

Страница 615: ...71 SRC 4 Vab Angle Degrees Source 4 phase AB voltage angle 6872 SRC 4 Vbc Mag Volts Source 4 phase BC voltage magnitude 6874 SRC 4 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 4 phase BC voltage angle 6875 SRC 4 Vca Mag Volts Source 4 phase CA voltage magnitude 6877 SRC 4 Vca Angle Degrees Source 4 phase CA voltage angle 6878 SRC 4 Vx RMS Volts Source 4 auxiliary voltage RMS 6880 SRC 4 Vx Mag Volts Source 4 auxiliary...

Страница 616: ...rce 3 phase A real power 7236 SRC 3 Pb Watts Source 3 phase B real power 7238 SRC 3 Pc Watts Source 3 phase C real power 7240 SRC 3 Q Vars Source 3 three phase reactive power 7242 SRC 3 Qa Vars Source 3 phase A reactive power 7244 SRC 3 Qb Vars Source 3 phase B reactive power 7246 SRC 3 Qc Vars Source 3 phase C reactive power 7248 SRC 3 S VA Source 3 three phase apparent power 7250 SRC 3 Sa VA Sou...

Страница 617: ... Ang 0 Degrees Fault 1 post fault phase A current angle 9045 Postfault Ib Mag 0 Amps Fault 1 post fault phase B current magnitude 9047 Postfault Ib Ang 0 Degrees Fault 1 post fault phase B current angle 9048 Postfault Ic Mag 0 Amps Fault 1 post fault phase C current magnitude 9050 Postfault Ic Ang 0 Degrees Fault 1 post fault phase C current angle 9051 Postfault Va Mag 0 Volts Fault 1 post fault p...

Страница 618: ...nt angle 9611 PMU 1 Ig Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current magnitude 9613 PMU 1 Ig Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current angle 9614 PMU 1 I1 Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 positive sequence current magnitude 9616 PMU 1 I1 Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 positive sequence current angle 9617 PMU 1 I2 Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 negative sequence curr...

Страница 619: ...13 Value RTD input 13 actual value 13565 RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD input 14 actual value 13566 RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD input 15 actual value 13567 RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD input 16 actual value 13568 RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD input 17 actual value 13569 RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD input 18 actual value 13570 RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD input 19 actual value 13571 RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD input 20 actual value 1...

Страница 620: ... angle 32456 Dist Zbg Mag Ohms Distance Zbg magnitude 32457 Dist Zbg Angle Degrees Distance Zbg angle 32458 Dist Zcg Mag Ohms Distance Zcg magnitude 32459 Dist Zcg Angle Degrees Distance Zcg angle 32768 Tracking Frequency Hz Tracking frequency 39168 FlexElement 1 Value FlexElement 1 actual value 39170 FlexElement 2 Value FlexElement 2 actual value 39172 FlexElement 3 Value FlexElement 3 actual val...

Страница 621: ...E Analog In 15 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 15 45614 GOOSE Analog In 16 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 16 61439 PMU Num Triggers Phasor measurement unit recording number of triggers Table A 2 FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS ADDRESS FLEXINTEGER NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION 9881 PMU 1 SOC seconds PMU 1 SOC timestamps 9883 PMU 1 FRACSEC seconds PMU 1 FRACSEC timestamps 9885 PMU 1 STAT PMU 1 STAT flags 9968 GOOSE UInt...

Страница 622: ...A 12 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin A 1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A A ...

Страница 623: ...e 10 100Base TX or 100Base FX B 1 3 DATA LINK LAYER Modbus RTU communications takes place in packets that are groups of asynchronously framed byte data The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet The following information describes the general for mat for both transmit and receive packets For details on packet formatting see subsequent sections describing each f...

Страница 624: ...the response the transaction identifier of the request Protocol Identifier Used for intra system multiplexing The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0 Length The length field is a byte count of the following fields including the Unit Identifier and data fields Unit Identifier For the purposes of the UR this field is equivalent to the Modbus RTU SLAVE ADDRESS field The client must use the s...

Страница 625: ...al number of data bytes Di i th data byte i 0 to N 1 G 16 bit characteristic polynomial 1010000000000001 binary with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr x right shift operator th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag a 0 is shifted into the MSbit of x all other bits are shifted right one location ALGORITHM 1 FFFF hex A 2 0 i 3 0 j 4 Di Alow Alow 5 j 1 j 6 shr A 7 Is there a carry No go to 8...

Страница 626: ...ng read Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packetsin Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the values 4...

Страница 627: ...00 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h 17 dec Table B 5 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high ...

Страница 628: ... the function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h Table B 8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET...

Страница 629: ...n specific file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IE...

Страница 630: ... TXT replace nnn with the desired starting record number To read from a specific record to another specific record use the following filename EVT TXT xxxxx yyyyy replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number g READING FAULT REPORT FILES Fault report data has been available via the D60 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2 00 The file name is f...

Страница 631: ...ber 8 items F203 none Product Information Read Only Written by Factory 0110 FPGA Version F206 none 0113 FPGA Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 Product Information Read Write 0120 Undefined 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Self Test Targets Read Only 0200 Self Test States 4 items 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0 Front Panel Read Only 0208 LED Column n State n 1 to 10 10 items 0 to 65535 1 F501 0 0220 Display Message F204 non...

Страница 632: ...429 Virtual Input 42 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042A Virtual Input 43 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042B Virtual Input 44 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042C Virtual Input 45 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042D Virtual Input 46 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042E Virtual Input 47 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042F Virtual Input 48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input 49 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0431 Virtual Inpu...

Страница 633: ... 24 05E4 Repeated for Binary Input 25 05E8 Repeated for Binary Input 26 05EC Repeated for Binary Input 27 05F0 Repeated for Binary Input 28 05F4 Repeated for Binary Input 29 05F8 Repeated for Binary Input 30 05FC Repeated for Binary Input 31 0600 Repeated for Binary Input 32 0604 Repeated for Binary Input 33 0608 Repeated for Binary Input 34 060C Repeated for Binary Input 35 0610 Repeated for Bina...

Страница 634: ...for Binary Input 82 06CC Repeated for Binary Input 83 06D0 Repeated for Binary Input 84 06D4 Repeated for Binary Input 85 06D8 Repeated for Binary Input 86 06DC Repeated for Binary Input 87 06E0 Repeated for Binary Input 88 06E4 Repeated for Binary Input 89 06E8 Repeated for Binary Input 90 06EC Repeated for Binary Input 91 06F0 Repeated for Binary Input 92 06F4 Repeated for Binary Input 93 06F8 R...

Страница 635: ...C103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 9 32768 to 32767 1 F002 0 0723 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 2 0742 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 3 0761 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 4 IEC103 Commands Read Write Setting 32 Modules 0780 IEC103 Command 1 FUN 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0781 IEC103 Command 1 INF 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0782 IEC103 Command 1 Param ON 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0783 IEC103 Command 1 Param OFF 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0784 Repeated...

Страница 636: ... of Targets 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Write 14E2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E3 Target Message F200 Contact Input Output States Read Only 1500 Contact Input States 6 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1508 Virtual Input States 8 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1510 Contact Output States 4 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1518 Contact Output Current States 4 items 0 to 6...

Страница 637: ... 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160D Field RTD Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160E Field Transducer Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 Ethernet Fibre Channel Status Read Write 1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail 1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail 1612 Ethernet Tertiary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail Data Logger Actuals Read...

Страница 638: ... Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 181F Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1821 Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1822 Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1824 Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1825 Reserved 27 items F001 ...

Страница 639: ...Three Phase Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C0A Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C0C Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C0E Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C10 Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power 1000000000000 to 100000000000...

Страница 640: ...upervision Phase B 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21A8 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase C 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21AA Breaker Flashover 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21AC Breaker Flashover 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 21AD Breaker Flashover 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self Reset 21AE Reserved 4 items F001 0 21B2 Repeated for breaker flashover 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actuals Read Only Non Vo...

Страница 641: ...fault Phase C Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2352 Fault 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2354 Fault 1 Phase A Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2355 Fault 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2357 Fault 1 Phase B Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2358 Fault 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 23...

Страница 642: ... Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 257E PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle 180 to 180 0 1 F002 0 257F PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 2581 PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle 180 to 180 0 1 F002 0 2582 PMU 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2584 PMU 1 Phase A Current Angle 180 to 180 0 1 F002 0 2585 PMU 1 Phase B Current Magnitud...

Страница 643: ...IEC 61850 Received uinteger 8 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 2700 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 9 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 2702 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 10 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 2704 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 11 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 2706 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 12 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 2708 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 13 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 270A IEC 61850 Received uinteger 14 0 to ...

Страница 644: ... Data Block 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 3203 Block of Data from Requested File 122 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Security Read Write 3280 Administrator Alphanumeric Password F202 none Security Read Only 328A Administrator Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Security Read Write 328B Administrator Alphanumeric Password Entry F202 none Security Read Write Setting 3295 Supervisor Alphanumeric Pa...

Страница 645: ...items 0 to 9999 1 F001 3 3374 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 9999 1 F001 3 Security Reserved Modbus Registers Read Only 3375 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 5 1 F617 3 Engineer Event Recorder Actual Values Read Only 3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to...

Страница 646: ...3501 RTD Input 18 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3502 RTD Input 19 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3503 RTD Input 20 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3504 RTD Input 21 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3505 RTD Input 22 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3506 RTD Input 23 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3507 RTD Input 24 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3508 RTD Input 25 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 ...

Страница 647: ...5 1 F001 0 3754 Undefined 2 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 PTP Port Configuration Read Write Setting 3 Modules 3756 PTP Port x Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3757 Port x Path Delay Adder 0 to 60000 ns 1 F001 0 3758 Port x Path Delay Asymmetry 1000 to 1000 ns 1 F002 0 3759 Repeated for module number 2 375C Repeated for module number 3 Real Time Clock Synchronizing Actuals Read Only 375F RTC Sync Source 0...

Страница 648: ...0 1 F060 1 389D Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 1 F166 1 Vag 389E Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 0 1 F001 664 389F Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 1 F060 1 38A1 Repeated for module number 2 38B2 Repeated for module number 3 38C3 Repeated for module number 4 38D4 Repeated for module number 5 38E5 Repeated for module number 6 Field Unit Contact Inputs Read Write Setting 40 ...

Страница 649: ...rigin 1 0 to 8 1 F256 0 none 3B07 Field Shared Input 1Channel Origin 1 1 to 15 1 F001 1 3B08 Field Shared Input 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 3B09 Repeated for Field Shared Input 2 3B12 Repeated for Field Shared Input 3 3B1B Repeated for Field Shared Input 4 3B24 Repeated for Field Shared Input 5 3B2D Repeated for Field Shared Input 6 3B36 Repeated for Field Shared Input 7 3B3F Repeated for Fie...

Страница 650: ...3D Repeated for Field Shared Output 2 3E4A Repeated for Field Shared Output 3 3E57 Repeated for Field Shared Output 4 3E64 Repeated for Field Shared Output 5 3E71 Repeated for Field Shared Output 6 3E7E Repeated for Field Shared Output 7 3E8B Repeated for Field Shared Output 8 3E98 Repeated for Field Shared Output 9 3EA5 Repeated for Field Shared Output 10 3EB2 Repeated for Field Shared Output 11 ...

Страница 651: ...d Entry 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none 401E Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none Passwords Read Only 4028 Command Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4029 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Passwords Read Write Setting 402A Command Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 5 402B Setting Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 30 402C Invalid Password Attempts 2...

Страница 652: ...or the TFTP Protocol zero means automatic 2 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5 40AB DNP Unsolicited Responses Maximum Retries 1 to 255 1 F001 10 40AC DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 1 F001 1 40AD Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 1 F192 1 Half Duplex 40AE DNP Curr...

Страница 653: ...OSE Enabled 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4119 PRT2 PRP Mcst Addr F072 0 411C IEC Communications Reserved 33 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 413E High Enet Traffic Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 413F High Enet Traffic Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 1 F001 2 4141 DNP Object 2 Default Variation 1 to 3 1 F001 2 4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 1 F523 0 1 4143...

Страница 654: ...rite 41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 1 F001 50 41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 41C5 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 1 F183 2 16 samples cycle 41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel n 16 items 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n 63 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Trip and Alarm LEDs Read Write Setting 42B0 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Opera...

Страница 655: ...ted for User Programmable LED 46 434A Repeated for User Programmable LED 47 434D Repeated for User Programmable LED 48 PRP Status Read Only 4363 Total Received Port A 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 4365 Total Received Port B 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 4367 Total Mismatches Port A 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 4369 Total Mismatches Port B 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 436B Total Errors 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 IPv4 ...

Страница 656: ...ndary 25 to 240 V 0 1 F001 664 4506 Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 1 1 F060 1 4508 Repeated for VT Bank 2 4510 Repeated for VT Bank 3 4518 Repeated for VT Bank 4 4520 Repeated for VT Bank 5 4528 Repeated for VT Bank 6 Source Settings Read Write Setting 6 Modules 4580 Source 1 Name 0 to 1 F206 SRC 1 4583 Source 1 Phase CT 0 to 63 1 F400 0 4584 Source 1 Ground CT 0 to 63 1 F400 0 4585 Source 1 Phas...

Страница 657: ...ompensated OV STG2 PKP 0 25 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1300 48F8 Compensated OV STG2 Delay 0 to 600 sec 0 01 F001 100 48F9 Compensated OV SGT3 PKP 0 25 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1300 48FA Compensated OV STG3 Delay 0 to 600 sec 0 01 F001 100 48FB Compensated OV Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 48FD Compensated OV Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 48FE Compensated OV Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled FlexCurve A Read ...

Страница 658: ...to 1 1 F500 0 4E1D Raw Field Data SI States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1E Raw Field Data SI Test States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1F Raw Field Data Brick ADC Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0 4E20 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0 4E21 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Voltage 0 to 0 01 V 0 01 F001 0 4E22 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Current 0 to 1 mA 1 F001 0 4E23 Raw Field D...

Страница 659: ... 5644 Repeated for RTD Input 30 5658 Repeated for RTD Input 31 566C Repeated for RTD Input 32 5680 Repeated for RTD Input 33 5694 Repeated for RTD Input 34 56A8 Repeated for RTD Input 35 56BC Repeated for RTD Input 36 56D0 Repeated for RTD Input 37 56E4 Repeated for RTD Input 38 56F8 Repeated for RTD Input 39 560C Repeated for RTD Input 40 5620 Repeated for RTD Input 41 5734 Repeated for RTD Input...

Страница 660: ...or 5903 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1000 5904 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 1 F103 0 IEEE Mod Inv 5905 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 0 01 F001 100 5906 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 1 F104 0 Instantaneous 5907 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5908 Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase 3 items 0 to 4294967295 1 ...

Страница 661: ...epeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 5B55 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Read Write Grouped Setting 12 Modules 5C00 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5C01 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 5C02 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1000 5C03 Neutral Inst...

Страница 662: ... for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 5DC2 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 5DD3 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 5DE4 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 5DF5 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 5E06 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 5E17 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 5E28 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Ove...

Страница 663: ...ce Overvoltage Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 50 6444 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 50 6445 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6447 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6448 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6449 Repeated for module number 2 6452 Repeated for module number 3 Overfre...

Страница 664: ...ead Write Grouped Setting 2 Modules 6680 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6681 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 6682 Sensitive Directional Power 1 RCA 0 to 359 degrees 1 F001 0 6683 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Calibration 0 to 0 95 degrees 0 05 F001 0 6684 Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG1 SMIN 1 2 to 1 2 pu 0 001 F002 100 6685 Sen...

Страница 665: ... 0 Pole Curr OR Custom 6794 Start Timer Zone 2 Phase Input 1 0 to 429496729 1 F300 0 6796 Start Timer Zone 2 Phase Input 2 0 to 429496729 1 F300 0 6798 Start Timer Zone 2 Ground Input 1 0 to 429496729 1 F300 0 679A Start Timer Zone 2 Ground Input 2 0 to 429496729 1 F300 0 679C Phase Selector Reset Delay 0 5 to 3 s 0 001 F001 500 679D Reserved 4 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 Open Pole Detect Read Write Set...

Страница 666: ...ercurrent Reverse 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 682C Hybrid POTT 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 1 F198 0 1 682D Hybrid POTT 1P Rx1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 682F Hybrid POTT 1P Rx2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6831 Hybrid POTT 1P Rx3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6833 Hybrid POTT 1P Rx4 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6835 Hybrid POTT 1P Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6836 Hybrid POTT 1P Event 0 to 1 1 F102 ...

Страница 667: ...er 2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6886 Autoreclose Close Time Breaker 2 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 10 6887 Autoreclose Transfer 1 to 2 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 6888 Autoreclose Transfer 2 to 1 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 6889 Autoreclose Breaker 1 Fail Option 0 to 1 1 F081 0 Continue 688A Autoreclose Breaker 2 Fail Option 0 to 1 1 F081 0 Continue 688B Autoreclose 1P Dead Time 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 100 688C Autoreclos...

Страница 668: ...to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7002 Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1000 7003 Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 1 F111 0 Definite Time 7004 Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7005 Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 100 7006 Phase Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7008 Phase Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7009 Phase Undervo...

Страница 669: ...omparator Limit 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7135 Ground Distance Zone 1 Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 7136 Ground Distance Zone 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7138 Ground Distance Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7139 Ground Distance Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 713A Ground Distance Zone 1 Shape 0 to 1 1 F120 0 Mho 713B Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0 Z1 Magnitude 0 to 10 0 01 F001...

Страница 670: ...al Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing 0 to 4 1 F230 0 Voltage 7233 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA 90 to 90 Lag 1 F002 75 7234 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7235 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7236 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7237 Ne...

Страница 671: ...dules 74A0 Disconnect Switch 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 74A1 Disconnect Switch 1 Name F206 SW 1 74A4 Disconnect Switch 1 Mode 0 to 1 1 F157 0 3 Pole 74A5 Disconnect Switch 1 Open 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74A7 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Open 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74A9 Disconnect Switch 1 Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74AB Disconnect Switch 1 Block Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74AD Dis...

Страница 672: ...1 77AC Broken Conductor 1 I2 I1 Ratio 20 to 100 0 1 F001 200 77AD Broken Conductor 1 I1 Minimum 0 05 to 1 pu 0 01 F001 10 77AE Broken Conductor 1 I1 Maximum 0 05 to 5 pu 0 01 F001 150 77AF Broken Conductor 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 20000 77B0 Broken Conductor 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 77B2 Broken Conductor 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 77B3 Broken Conductor 1 Events 0 to...

Страница 673: ...d 7A89 Underfrequency Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7A8A Underfreqency 1 Reserved 5 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 7A8F Repeated for Underfrequency 2 7A9E Repeated for Underfrequency 3 7AAD Repeated for Underfrequency 4 7ABC Repeated for Underfrequency 5 7ACB Repeated for Underfrequency 6 User Programmable Pushbuttons Read Write Setting 16 Modules 7B60 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 2 1 F...

Страница 674: ...actance 2147483647 to 2147483647 ohm 1 F060 0 7E9F BC Loop Impedance Magnitude 0 to 2147483647 ohm 1 F060 0 7EA1 BC Loop Impedance Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 7EA2 CA Loop Resistance 2147483647 to 2147483647 ohm 1 F060 0 7EA4 CA Loop Reactance 2147483647 to 2147483647 ohm 1 F060 0 7EA6 CA Loop Impedance Magnitude 0 to 2147483647 ohm 1 F060 0 7EA8 CA Loop Impedance Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees ...

Страница 675: ... Undervoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7F62 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 700 7F63 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F64 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 1 F111 0 Definite Time 7F65 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 100 7F66 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7F68 Auxiliary Undervoltage...

Страница 676: ...67295 1 F300 0 8617 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 8618 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 8619 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 861A Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 861B Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 861C Breaker...

Страница 677: ...ment 20 8BB8 Repeated for Digital Element 21 8BCE Repeated for Digital Element 22 8BE4 Repeated for Digital Element 23 8BFA Repeated for Digital Element 24 8C10 Repeated for Digital Element 25 8C26 Repeated for Digital Element 26 8C3C Repeated for Digital Element 27 8C52 Repeated for Digital Element 28 8C68 Repeated for Digital Element 29 8C7E Repeated for Digital Element 30 8C94 Repeated for Digi...

Страница 678: ...F518 0 Milliseconds 900D FlexElement 1 DeltaT 20 to 86400 1 F003 20 900F FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 9010 FlexElement 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 9011 FlexElement 1 Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 9013 FlexElement 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 9014 FlexElement 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 9015 Repeated for FlexElement 2 902A Repeated for FlexElement 3 90...

Страница 679: ...eated for DCmA Output 8 9390 Repeated for DCmA Output 9 9396 Repeated for DCmA Output 10 939C Repeated for DCmA Output 11 93A2 Repeated for DCmA Output 12 93A8 Repeated for DCmA Output 13 93AE Repeated for DCmA Output 14 93B4 Repeated for DCmA Output 15 93BA Repeated for DCmA Output 16 93C0 Repeated for DCmA Output 17 93C6 Repeated for DCmA Output 18 93CC Repeated for DCmA Output 19 93D2 Repeated ...

Страница 680: ...C61850 GOOSE UInteger 8 98B8 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 9 98BB Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 10 98BE Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 11 98C1 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 12 98C4 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 13 98C7 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 14 98CA Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 15 98CD Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 16 FlexElement Actua...

Страница 681: ... Channel 2 Status 0 to 2 1 F134 1 OK 9AA3 Teleprotection Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 9AA4 Teleprotection Network Status 0 to 2 1 F134 2 n a 9AAF Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 9AB0 Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 9AC0 Teleprotection Input 1 States 1 per register 16 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 9AD0 Teleprotection Input 2 States 1 p...

Страница 682: ...t 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A319 Digital Counter 1 Freeze Count 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A31B Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A31D Reserved 11 items F001 0 A328 Repeated for Digital Counter 2 A350 Repeated for Digital Counter 3 A378 Repeated for Digital Counter 4 A3A0 Repeated for Digital Counter 5 A3C8 Repeated for Digital Counter 6 A3F0 Repeated for Digital Counter 7 A418...

Страница 683: ...95 1 F300 0 A818 POTT 1P Scheme Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A81A Reserved 22 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 Pilot POTT1 1P Read Write Setting A830 POTT1 1P Scheme Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A831 POTT1 1P Permissive Echo 0 to 2 1 F199 0 Disabled A832 POTT1 1P Rx Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 A833 POTT1 1P Trans Block Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 20 A834 POTT1 1P Trans Block Rese...

Страница 684: ...kup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 A905 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 A906 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A908 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset A909 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A90A Frequency Rate of Change 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 A90B Frequency Rate of Change 1 Trend ...

Страница 685: ...001 30 AB0B Repeated for Module 2 AB16 Repeated for Module 3 AB21 Repeated for Module 4 AB2C Repeated for Module 5 AB37 Repeated for Module 6 IEC 61850 LN name prefixes Read Write Settings AB48 IEC 61850 logical node LPHD1 name prefix 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AB4B IEC 61850 logical node PIOCx name prefix 72 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AC23 IEC 61850 logical node PTOCx name prefix 24 items 0 to 6553...

Страница 686: ...t 19 AF95 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 20 AF9C Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 21 AFA3 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 22 AFAA Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 23 AFB1 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 24 AFB8 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 25 AFBF Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 26 AFC6 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog inpu...

Страница 687: ...to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0DC IEC 61850 MMXU A neut Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0DE IEC 61850 MMXU W phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E0 IEC 61850 MMXU W phsB Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E2 IEC 61850 MMXU W phsC Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E4 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E6 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr phsB Deadb...

Страница 688: ...002 to 30 000 pu 0 001 F001 60 B306 Wattmetric ground fault 1 overcurrent pickup delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 20 B307 Wattmetric ground fault 1 power pickup 0 001 to 1 2 pu 0 001 F001 100 B308 Wattmetric ground fault 1 ECA 0 to 360 Lag 1 F001 0 B309 Wattmetric ground fault 1 power pickup delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 20 B30A Wattmetric ground fault 1 curve 0 to 5 1 F236 0 Definite Time B30B Wattmetric ...

Страница 689: ...ion Read Write Setting 8 Modules B5A0 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 None B5A1 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID F209 GOOSEOut_x_ B5C2 Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address F072 0 B5C5 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 1 F001 4 B5C6 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 1 F001 0 B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 1 F...

Страница 690: ...ated for Contact Input 15 BB78 Repeated for Contact Input 16 BB80 Repeated for Contact Input 17 BB88 Repeated for Contact Input 18 BB90 Repeated for Contact Input 19 BB98 Repeated for Contact Input 20 BBA0 Repeated for Contact Input 21 BBA8 Repeated for Contact Input 22 BBB0 Repeated for Contact Input 23 BBB8 Repeated for Contact Input 24 BBC0 Repeated for Contact Input 25 BBC8 Repeated for Contac...

Страница 691: ...69 BD28 Repeated for Contact Input 70 BD30 Repeated for Contact Input 71 BD38 Repeated for Contact Input 72 BD40 Repeated for Contact Input 73 BD48 Repeated for Contact Input 74 BD50 Repeated for Contact Input 75 BD58 Repeated for Contact Input 76 BD60 Repeated for Contact Input 77 BD68 Repeated for Contact Input 78 BD70 Repeated for Contact Input 79 BD78 Repeated for Contact Input 80 BD80 Repeate...

Страница 692: ...ed for Virtual Input 19 BF14 Repeated for Virtual Input 20 BF20 Repeated for Virtual Input 21 BF2C Repeated for Virtual Input 22 BF38 Repeated for Virtual Input 23 BF44 Repeated for Virtual Input 24 BF50 Repeated for Virtual Input 25 BF5C Repeated for Virtual Input 26 BF68 Repeated for Virtual Input 27 BF74 Repeated for Virtual Input 28 BF80 Repeated for Virtual Input 29 BF8C Repeated for Virtual ...

Страница 693: ...ed for Virtual Output 7 C168 Repeated for Virtual Output 8 C170 Repeated for Virtual Output 9 C178 Repeated for Virtual Output 10 C180 Repeated for Virtual Output 11 C188 Repeated for Virtual Output 12 C190 Repeated for Virtual Output 13 C198 Repeated for Virtual Output 14 C1A0 Repeated for Virtual Output 15 C1A8 Repeated for Virtual Output 16 C1B0 Repeated for Virtual Output 17 C1B8 Repeated for ...

Страница 694: ...d for Virtual Output 61 C318 Repeated for Virtual Output 62 C320 Repeated for Virtual Output 63 C328 Repeated for Virtual Output 64 C330 Repeated for Virtual Output 65 C338 Repeated for Virtual Output 66 C340 Repeated for Virtual Output 67 C348 Repeated for Virtual Output 68 C350 Repeated for Virtual Output 69 C358 Repeated for Virtual Output 70 C360 Repeated for Virtual Output 71 C368 Repeated fo...

Страница 695: ...g Current operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C45E Clear Breaker 3 Arcing Current operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C460 Clear Breaker 4 Arcing Current operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C468 Clear Energy operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C46C Clear Unauthorized Access operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C470 Clear Platform Direct Input Output Statistics operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C472 Reserved 13 ite...

Страница 696: ...led Direct Inputs Outputs Read Write Setting C880 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 1 F001 1 C881 Direct I O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C882 Platform Direct I O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64 C883 Direct I O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C884 Platform Direct I O Crossover Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Direct input output commands Read Write ...

Страница 697: ... to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CADC Reserved 4 items 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAE0 Direct I O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAE1 Direct I O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 1 F001 600 CAE2 Direct I O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAE3 Direct I O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAE4 Reserved 4 ...

Страница 698: ... 64 1 F205 Rem Ip 1 CFAA Repeated for Remote Input 2 CFB4 Repeated for Remote Input 3 CFBE Repeated for Remote Input 4 CFC8 Repeated for Remote Input 5 CFD2 Repeated for Remote Input 6 CFDC Repeated for Remote Input 7 CFE6 Repeated for Remote Input 8 CFF0 Repeated for Remote Input 9 CFFA Repeated for Remote Input 10 D004 Repeated for Remote Input 11 D00E Repeated for Remote Input 12 D018 Repeated ...

Страница 699: ...peated for Remote Input 56 D1D0 Repeated for Remote Input 57 D1DA Repeated for Remote Input 58 D1E4 Repeated for Remote Input 59 D1EE Repeated for Remote Input 60 D1F8 Repeated for Remote Input 61 D202 Repeated for Remote Input 62 D20C Repeated for Remote Input 63 D216 Repeated for Remote Input 64 Remote Output DNA Pairs Read Write Setting 32 Modules D220 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand 0 to 429496729...

Страница 700: ... D2BC Repeated for Remote Output 8 D2C0 Repeated for Remote Output 9 D2C4 Repeated for Remote Output 10 D2C8 Repeated for Remote Output 11 D2CC Repeated for Remote Output 12 D2D0 Repeated for Remote Output 13 D2D4 Repeated for Remote Output 14 D2D8 Repeated for Remote Output 15 D2DC Repeated for Remote Output 16 D2E0 Repeated for Remote Output 17 D2E4 Repeated for Remote Output 18 D2E8 Repeated fo...

Страница 701: ...tlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D33D IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO30 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D33E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO31 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D33F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO32 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D340 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO33 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D341 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO34 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D342 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO35 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1...

Страница 702: ...394 Repeated for Remote Device 14 D398 Repeated for Remote Device 15 D39C Repeated for Remote Device 16 D3A0 Repeated for Remote Device 17 D3A4 Repeated for Remote Device 18 D3A8 Repeated for Remote Device 19 D3AC Repeated for Remote Device 20 D3B0 Repeated for Remote Device 21 D3B4 Repeated for Remote Device 22 D3B8 Repeated for Remote Device 23 D3BC Repeated for Remote Device 24 D3C0 Repeated fo...

Страница 703: ...for Contact Output 30 D5A2 Repeated for Contact Output 31 D5B1 Repeated for Contact Output 32 D5C0 Repeated for Contact Output 33 D5CF Repeated for Contact Output 34 D5DE Repeated for Contact Output 35 D5ED Repeated for Contact Output 36 D5FC Repeated for Contact Output 37 D60B Repeated for Contact Output 38 D61A Repeated for Contact Output 39 D629 Repeated for Contact Output 40 D638 Repeated for ...

Страница 704: ...puts 18 D9F6 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 19 D909 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 20 D91C Repeated for DCmA Inputs 21 D92F Repeated for DCmA Inputs 22 D942 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 23 D955 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 24 DNP IEC Points Read Write Setting D968 DNP IEC 60870 5 104 Binary Input Points 256 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 DB68 DNP IEC 60870 5 104 Analog Input Points 256 items 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 Synch...

Страница 705: ...65534 1 F001 4713 E8CD PMU Aggregator 1 90 5 UDP Port 0 to 65534 1 F001 102 E8CE PMU Aggregator 1 PDC Network Control 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled E8CF Aggregator 1 Include PMU1 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D0 Aggregator 1 Include PMU2 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D1 Aggregator 1 Include PMU3 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D2 Aggregator 1 Include PMU4 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D3 Aggregator 1 Include PMU5 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D4 Ag...

Страница 706: ...vents 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Phasor Measurement Unit Frequency Trigger Read Write Setting EAEC PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled EAED PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Low Frequency 20 to 70 Hz 0 01 F001 4900 EAEE PMU 1 Frequency Trigger High Frequency 20 to 70 Hz 0 01 F001 6100 EAEF PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Pickup Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 10 EAF0 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Dropout Ti...

Страница 707: ...ation Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBEA PMU Ig Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 EBEB PMU Ig Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBEC PMU Sequence Voltage Shift Angle 180 to 180 30 F002 0 EBED PMU Sequence Current Shift Angle 180 to 180 30 F002 0 Phasor Measurement Unit Network Reporting Configuration Read Write Setting EC48 PMU Network Reporting Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled...

Страница 708: ...ATE UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00 00 00 January 1 1970 F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are Month Day MM DD xxxx Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Day 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year xx xx YYYY 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1 F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are ...

Страница 709: ...exCurve B 3 FlexCurve C F118 ENUMERATION OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE 0 Automatic Overwrite 1 Protected F120 ENUMERATION DISTANCE SHAPE 0 Mho 1 Quad F122 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE 0 Phasor 1 RMS F123 ENUMERATION CT SECONDARY 0 1 A 1 5 A F124 ENUMERATION LIST OF ELEMENTS Bitmask Curve shape Bitmask Curve shape 0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse 1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv 2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t 3 I...

Страница 710: ... Power 2 224 SRC1 VT Fuse Failure 225 SRC2 VT Fuse Failure 226 SRC3 VT Fuse Failure 227 SRC4 VT Fuse Failure 228 SRC5 VT Fuse Failure 229 SRC6 VT Fuse Failure 232 SRC1 50DD Disturbance Detection 233 SRC2 50DD Disturbance Detection 234 SRC3 50DD Disturbance Detection 235 SRC4 50DD Disturbance Detection 242 Open Pole Detector Bitmask Element 280 Breaker Failure 1 281 Breaker Failure 2 282 Breaker Fa...

Страница 711: ...l Element 16 708 Digital Element 17 709 Digital Element 18 710 Digital Element 19 711 Digital Element 20 712 Digital Element 21 713 Digital Element 22 714 Digital Element 23 715 Digital Element 24 Bitmask Element 716 Digital Element 25 717 Digital Element 26 718 Digital Element 27 719 Digital Element 28 720 Digital Element 29 721 Digital Element 30 722 Digital Element 31 723 Digital Element 32 724...

Страница 712: ...ser Programmable Pushbutton 1 901 User Programmable Pushbutton 2 902 User Programmable Pushbutton 3 903 User Programmable Pushbutton 4 904 User Programmable Pushbutton 5 905 User Programmable Pushbutton 6 906 User Programmable Pushbutton 7 907 User Programmable Pushbutton 8 908 User Programmable Pushbutton 9 909 User Programmable Pushbutton 10 910 User Programmable Pushbutton 11 911 User Programma...

Страница 713: ... Trouble 27 Remote Device Offline 28 Direct Device Offline 29 Maintenance Alert 30 Any Minor Error 31 Any Major Error 33 Maintenance Alert 64 Maintenance Alert 65 IEC 61850 Data Set 66 Aggregator Error 67 Unit Not Calibrated 68 Settings Save Error 69 SRAM Data Error 70 Program Memory 71 Watchdog Error 72 Low On Memory 73 Prototype Firmware 74 Module Failure 01 75 Module Failure 02 76 Module Failur...

Страница 714: ...g Off 31 Unauthorized Access 32 System Integrity Recovery 33 System Integrity Recovery 06 34 System Integrity Recovery 07 Bitmask Fault Type Bitmask Fault type 0 NA 6 AC 1 AG 7 ABG 2 BG 8 BCG 3 CG 9 ACG 4 AB 10 ABC 5 BC 11 ABCG Bitmask Definition Bitmask Type Bitmask Type Bitmask Type 0 None 5 Dy9 10 Yd7 1 Dy1 6 Dy11 11 Yd9 2 Dy3 7 Yd1 12 Yd11 3 Dy5 8 Yd3 4 Dy7 9 Yd5 Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 0 ...

Страница 715: ...URRENT TYPE 0 Neg Sequence 1 Zero Sequence F183 ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS F184 ENUMERATION REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET 31 DNA 31 66 Dataset Item 2 32 DNA 32 67 Dataset Item 3 33 UserSt 1 34 UserSt 2 96 Dataset Item 32 Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot 0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U 1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V 2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W 3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X Bitmask dcmA input output range 0 0 to 1 mA 1 0 to ...

Страница 716: ...ACTER ASCII TEXT F207 TEXT4 4 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT F211 ENUMERATION SOURCE SELECTION 0 None 1 SRC 1 2 SRC 2 3 SRC 3 4 SRC 4 5 SRC 5 6 SRC 6 F213 TEXT32 32 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT F214 TEXT64 64 CHARACTER ASCII TEXTF220 ENUMERATION PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress 0 use between real keys 23 Reset 24 User 1 1 1 25 User 2 2 2 26 User 3 3 3 27 User programmable key 1 4 4 28 U...

Страница 717: ...hsC cVal mag f 285 MMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 286 MMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 287 MMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 288 MMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 289 MMXU1 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 290 MMXU1 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 291 MMXU1 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 292 MMXU1 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 293 MMXU1 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 294 MMXU2 MX TotW mag f 295 MMXU2 MX TotVAr mag f 296 MMXU2 MX TotVA mag f 297 MMXU2 MX TotPF ...

Страница 718: ...g f 385 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal mag f 386 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal ang f 387 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal mag f 388 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal ang f Value GOOSE dataset item 389 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f 390 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f 391 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal mag f 392 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal ang f 393 MMXU4 MX W phsA cVal mag f 394 MMXU4 MX W phsB cVal mag f 395 MMXU4 MX W phsC cVal mag f 396 MMXU4 MX VAr phsA cVal mag...

Страница 719: ... f 484 GGIO4 MX AnIn6 mag f 485 GGIO4 MX AnIn7 mag f 486 GGIO4 MX AnIn8 mag f 487 GGIO4 MX AnIn9 mag f 488 GGIO4 MX AnIn10 mag f 489 GGIO4 MX AnIn11 mag f 490 GGIO4 MX AnIn12 mag f 491 GGIO4 MX AnIn13 mag f 492 GGIO4 MX AnIn14 mag f 493 GGIO4 MX AnIn15 mag f 494 GGIO4 MX AnIn16 mag f Value GOOSE dataset item 495 GGIO4 MX AnIn17 mag f 496 GGIO4 MX AnIn18 mag f 497 GGIO4 MX AnIn19 mag f 498 GGIO4 MX...

Страница 720: ...nIn23 mag f 152 GGIO3 MX AnIn24 mag f 153 GGIO3 MX AnIn25 mag f 154 GGIO3 MX AnIn26 mag f 155 GGIO3 MX AnIn27 mag f 156 GGIO3 MX AnIn28 mag f 157 GGIO3 MX AnIn29 mag f 158 GGIO3 MX AnIn30 mag f 159 GGIO3 MX AnIn31 mag f 160 GGIO3 MX AnIn32 mag f 161 GGIO3 ST IndPos1 stVal 162 GGIO3 ST IndPos2 stVal 163 GGIO3 ST IndPos3 stVal 164 GGIO3 ST IndPos4 stVal 165 GGIO3 ST IndPos5 stVal 166 GGIO3 ST UIntIn...

Страница 721: ...TION BRICK AUX BANK ORIGIN Value Month 0 January 1 February 2 March 3 April 4 May 5 June 6 July 7 August 8 September 9 October 10 November 11 December Value Day 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Value Instance 0 First 1 Second 2 Third 3 Fourth 4 Last Value Instance 0 Disabled 1 Isolated 2 Forcible Value Description 0 5 5V 1 1 1mA 2 0 1mA 3 0 1mA 4 0 5mA 5 0 10m...

Страница 722: ...F type There can be a total of 64 types plus protection ele ments There can be a total of 256 descriptors of each type 0 Off 0 this is boolean FALSE value 1 On 1 this is boolean TRUE value 2 CONTACT INPUTS 1 to 96 3 CONTACT INPUTS OFF 1 to 96 4 VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32 6 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 1 to 64 8 CONTACT OUTPUTS 10 CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED 1 to 64 11 CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED 1 to...

Страница 723: ...01 UR_UINT16 LED STATUS Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on 0 indicates the LED is off F502 BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs The operate bit for element ID X is bit X mod 16 in register X 16 ...

Страница 724: ...0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 Valu e Keypress Valu e Keypress Valu e Keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Message Down 35 User PB 5 3 7 18 0 36 User PB 6 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7 5 9 20 38 User PB 8 6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9 7 Message Left 22 Value Down 40 User PB 10 8 4 23 Reset 41 User PB 11 9 5 24 User 1 42 User PB 12 10 6 25 User 2 44 User 4 11 Esca...

Страница 725: ...NUMERATION SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE INITIATION MODE Enumeration RTD trip voting 0 None 1 Group 2 RTD Input 1 3 RTD Input 2 4 RTD Input 3 5 RTD Input 4 6 RTD Input 5 7 RTD Input 6 8 RTD Input 7 9 RTD Input 8 10 RTD Input 9 11 RTD Input 10 12 RTD Input 11 13 RTD Input 12 Enumeration RTD open 0 None 1 Alarm 2 Block Enumeration DSCP type 0 None 1 Expedited Forwarding Enumeration COM2 port usage 0 RS485...

Страница 726: ... 31 PIOC2 ST Str general 32 PIOC2 ST Op general 33 PIOC3 ST Str general 34 PIOC3 ST Op general 35 PIOC4 ST Str general 36 PIOC4 ST Op general 37 PIOC5 ST Str general 38 PIOC5 ST Op general 39 PIOC6 ST Str general 40 PIOC6 ST Op general 41 PIOC7 ST Str general 42 PIOC7 ST Op general 43 PIOC8 ST Str general 44 PIOC8 ST Op general 45 PIOC9 ST Str general 46 PIOC9 ST Op general 47 PIOC10 ST Str genera...

Страница 727: ...l 136 PIOC54 ST Op general 137 PIOC55 ST Str general 138 PIOC55 ST Op general 139 PIOC56 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 140 PIOC56 ST Op general 141 PIOC57 ST Str general 142 PIOC57 ST Op general 143 PIOC58 ST Str general 144 PIOC58 ST Op general 145 PIOC59 ST Str general 146 PIOC59 ST Op general 147 PIOC60 ST Str general 148 PIOC60 ST Op general 149 PIOC61 ST Str genera...

Страница 728: ... 242 PTRC1 ST Op general 243 PTRC2 ST Tr general 244 PTRC2 ST Op general 245 PTRC3 ST Tr general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 246 PTRC3 ST Op general 247 PTRC4 ST Tr general 248 PTRC4 ST Op general 249 PTRC5 ST Tr general 250 PTRC5 ST Op general 251 PTRC6 ST Tr general 252 PTRC6 ST Op general 253 PTUV1 ST Str general 254 PTUV1 ST Op general 255 PTUV2 ST Str general 256 PTUV2 ST Op ge...

Страница 729: ...tVal 345 RREC6 ST Op general 346 RREC6 ST AutoRecSt stVal 347 CSWI1 ST Loc stVal 348 CSWI1 ST Pos stVal 349 CSWI2 ST Loc stVal 350 CSWI2 ST Pos stVal 351 CSWI3 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 352 CSWI3 ST Pos stVal 353 CSWI4 ST Loc stVal 354 CSWI4 ST Pos stVal 355 CSWI5 ST Loc stVal 356 CSWI5 ST Pos stVal 357 CSWI6 ST Loc stVal 358 CSWI6 ST Pos stVal 359 CSWI7 ST Loc stVal ...

Страница 730: ...O1 ST Ind48 stVal 455 GGIO1 ST Ind49 stVal 456 GGIO1 ST Ind50 stVal 457 GGIO1 ST Ind51 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 458 GGIO1 ST Ind52 stVal 459 GGIO1 ST Ind53 stVal 460 GGIO1 ST Ind54 stVal 461 GGIO1 ST Ind55 stVal 462 GGIO1 ST Ind56 stVal 463 GGIO1 ST Ind57 stVal 464 GGIO1 ST Ind58 stVal 465 GGIO1 ST Ind59 stVal 466 GGIO1 ST Ind60 stVal 467 GGIO1 ST Ind61 stVal 468 GGIO1 ST I...

Страница 731: ...Val mag f 563 MMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 564 MMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 565 MMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 566 MMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 567 MMXU1 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 568 MMXU1 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 569 MMXU1 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 570 MMXU1 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 571 MMXU1 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 572 MMXU2 MX TotW mag f 573 MMXU2 MX TotVAr mag f 574 MM...

Страница 732: ... MX A phsB cVal ang f 667 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f 668 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f 669 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 670 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal ang f 671 MMXU4 MX W phsA cVal mag f 672 MMXU4 MX W phsB cVal mag f 673 MMXU4 MX W phsC cVal mag f 674 MMXU4 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 675 MMXU4 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 676 MMXU4 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 677 MMXU4 MX VA phs...

Страница 733: ...n10 mag f 767 GGIO4 MX AnIn11 mag f 768 GGIO4 MX AnIn12 mag f 769 GGIO4 MX AnIn13 mag f 770 GGIO4 MX AnIn14 mag f 771 GGIO4 MX AnIn15 mag f 772 GGIO4 MX AnIn16 mag f 773 GGIO4 MX AnIn17 mag f 774 GGIO4 MX AnIn18 mag f 775 GGIO4 MX AnIn19 mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 776 GGIO4 MX AnIn20 mag f 777 GGIO4 MX AnIn21 mag f 778 GGIO4 MX AnIn22 mag f 779 GGIO4 MX AnIn23 mag f 780 GGIO4...

Страница 734: ...O1 ST Ind12 stVal 25 GGIO1 ST Ind13 q 26 GGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal 27 GGIO1 ST Ind14 q Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 28 GGIO1 ST Ind14 stVal 29 GGIO1 ST Ind15 q 30 GGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal 31 GGIO1 ST Ind16 q 32 GGIO1 ST Ind16 stVal 33 GGIO1 ST Ind17 q 34 GGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal 35 GGIO1 ST Ind18 q 36 GGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal 37 GGIO1 ST Ind19 q 38 GGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal 39 GGIO1 ST Ind20 q 40 GGIO1 ST...

Страница 735: ... Ind65 q 130 GGIO1 ST Ind65 stVal 131 GGIO1 ST Ind66 q 132 GGIO1 ST Ind66 stVal 133 GGIO1 ST Ind67 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 134 GGIO1 ST Ind67 stVal 135 GGIO1 ST Ind68 q 136 GGIO1 ST Ind68 stVal 137 GGIO1 ST Ind69 q 138 GGIO1 ST Ind69 stVal 139 GGIO1 ST Ind70 q 140 GGIO1 ST Ind70 stVal 141 GGIO1 ST Ind71 q 142 GGIO1 ST Ind71 stVal 143 GGIO1 ST Ind72 q 144 GGIO1 ST Ind72 stVal 145 GGIO1 ST...

Страница 736: ...items 240 GGIO1 ST Ind120 stVal 241 GGIO1 ST Ind121 q 242 GGIO1 ST Ind121 stVal 243 GGIO1 ST Ind122 q 244 GGIO1 ST Ind122 stVal 245 GGIO1 ST Ind123 q 246 GGIO1 ST Ind123 stVal 247 GGIO1 ST Ind124 q 248 GGIO1 ST Ind124 stVal 249 GGIO1 ST Ind125 q 250 GGIO1 ST Ind125 stVal 251 GGIO1 ST Ind126 q 252 GGIO1 ST Ind126 stVal 253 GGIO1 ST Ind127 q 254 GGIO1 ST Ind127 stVal 255 GGIO1 ST Ind128 q 256 GGIO1 ...

Страница 737: ...ag f 343 MMXU3 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 344 MMXU3 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 345 MMXU3 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 346 MMXU3 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 347 MMXU3 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 348 MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal mag f 349 MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal ang f 350 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal mag f 351 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal ang f 352 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal mag f 353 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal ang f 354 MMXU3 MX...

Страница 738: ... MMXU6 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 448 MMXU6 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 449 MMXU6 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 450 MMXU6 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 451 MMXU6 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 452 MMXU6 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 453 MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 454 MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 455 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 456 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 457 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 45...

Страница 739: ... PDIS2 ST Str general 554 PDIS2 ST Op general 555 PDIS3 ST Str general 556 PDIS3 ST Op general 557 PDIS4 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 558 PDIS4 ST Op general 559 PDIS5 ST Str general 560 PDIS5 ST Op general 561 PDIS6 ST Str general 562 PDIS6 ST Op general 563 PDIS7 ST Str general 564 PDIS7 ST Op general 565 PDIS8 ST Str general 566 PDIS8 ST Op general 567 PDIS9 ST Str general 568...

Страница 740: ...Str general 660 PIOC45 ST Op general 661 PIOC46 ST Str general 662 PIOC46 ST Op general 663 PIOC47 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 664 PIOC47 ST Op general 665 PIOC48 ST Str general 666 PIOC48 ST Op general 667 PIOC49 ST Str general 668 PIOC49 ST Op general 669 PIOC50 ST Str general 670 PIOC50 ST Op general 671 PIOC51 ST Str general 672 PIOC51 ST Op general 673 PIOC52 ST Str general...

Страница 741: ... 765 PTOV2 ST Str general 766 PTOV2 ST Op general 767 PTOV3 ST Str general 768 PTOV3 ST Op general 769 PTOV4 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 770 PTOV4 ST Op general 771 PTOV5 ST Str general 772 PTOV5 ST Op general 773 PTOV6 ST Str general 774 PTOV6 ST Op general 775 PTOV7 ST Str general 776 PTOV7 ST Op general 777 PTOV8 ST Str general 778 PTOV8 ST Op general 779 PTOV9 ST Str general...

Страница 742: ... FltDiskm mag f 870 RFLO2 MX FltDiskm mag f 871 RFLO3 MX FltDiskm mag f 872 RFLO4 MX FltDiskm mag f 873 RFLO5 MX FltDiskm mag f 874 RPSB1 ST Str general 875 RPSB1 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 876 RPSB1 ST BlkZn stVal 877 RREC1 ST Op general 878 RREC1 ST AutoRecSt stVal 879 RREC2 ST Op general 880 RREC2 ST AutoRecSt stVal 881 RREC3 ST Op general 882 RREC3 ST AutoRecSt stVal 883 RRE...

Страница 743: ...tVal 960 XSWI6 ST Pos stVal 961 XSWI7 ST Loc stVal 962 XSWI7 ST Pos stVal 963 XSWI8 ST Loc stVal 964 XSWI8 ST Pos stVal 965 XSWI9 ST Loc stVal 966 XSWI9 ST Pos stVal 967 XSWI10 ST Loc stVal 968 XSWI10 ST Pos stVal 969 XSWI11 ST Loc stVal 970 XSWI11 ST Pos stVal 971 XSWI12 ST Loc stVal 972 XSWI12 ST Pos stVal 973 XSWI13 ST Loc stVal 974 XSWI13 ST Pos stVal 975 XSWI14 ST Loc stVal 976 XSWI14 ST Pos ...

Страница 744: ...U TYPE 0 3 1 9 F631 ENUMERATION VIRTUAL INPUTS FOR IEC 103 Enumeration Role 0 None 1 Administrator 2 Supervisor 3 Engineer 4 Operator 5 Observer Enumeration Mode 0 Mode 1 1 and 3 Pole 1 Mode 2 1 Pole 2 Mode 3 3 Pole A 3 Mode 4 3 Pole B Enumeration Item 0 None 1 PP IRIG B PTP SNTP 2 IRIG B PP PTP SNTP 3 PP PTP IRIG B SNTP Enumeration Item 0 None 1 Port 1 PTP Clock 2 Port 2 PTP Clock 3 Port 3 PTP Cl...

Страница 745: ...GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Protection System B 123 APPENDIX B B 4 MEMORY MAPPING B ...

Страница 746: ...B 124 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin B 4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B B ...

Страница 747: ...ed that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN en...

Страница 748: ...lly be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the D60 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used...

Страница 749: ...ctor MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitud...

Страница 750: ...lt locator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provide...

Страница 751: ...ime of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro ...

Страница 752: ...nnection for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the D60 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the D60 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled...

Страница 753: ...in two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to r...

Страница 754: ...ded for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured datasets...

Страница 755: ...UNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1 Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1 The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags a single point sta...

Страница 756: ... configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme If the D60 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address that is the least significant bit of the first byte is not set the address used as the destina tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address but with the multicast bit set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 01...

Страница 757: ...guration process for IEC 61850 BDA Basic Data Attribute that is not structured DAI Instantiated Data Attribute DO Data Object type or instance depending on the context 842790A2 CDR Ethernet System configurator SCD file System specification tool SSD file System specification data ICD file 2 Process of creating ICD vendor 2 Creating ICD GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup ICD file 1 IED UR series OR ICD ...

Страница 758: ...ile SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the IE...

Страница 759: ...urators we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable datas...

Страница 760: ...dress node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points t...

Страница 761: ...t DataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled ...

Страница 762: ...s SDO The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure C 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType ele...

Страница 763: ...he procedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importi...

Страница 764: ...D file and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure C 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLeve...

Страница 765: ...nnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the contro...

Страница 766: ...update the D60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements ...

Страница 767: ...an one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the tar...

Страница 768: ...3 SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O RE...

Страница 769: ... set name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 7 S1 ServerDirectory TP...

Страница 770: ... Yes S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 17 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M GENERIC SUBSTATION ...

Страница 771: ... SendMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 20 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 23 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S58 SetFile TP O S59 DeleteFile TP O ...

Страница 772: ...cking A LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR Neutral current regulator ARCO Reactive power control ATCC Automatic tap changer controller AVCO Voltage control C LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH Alarm handling CCGR Cooling group control CILO Interlocking CPOW Point on wave switching CSWI Switch controller Yes CSYN Synchronizer controller F LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS FCNT Counter FCSD Curv...

Страница 773: ...Yes MSQI Sequence and imbalance Yes MSTA Metering statistics P LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF Differential Yes PDIR Direction comparison PDIS Distance Yes PDOP Directional overpower PDUP Directional underpower PFRC Rate of change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervisi...

Страница 774: ...fferential measurements RPSB Power swing detection blocking Yes RREC Autoreclosing Yes RSYN Synchronism check or synchronizing S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SCBR Circuit breaker supervision SIMG Insulation medium supervision gas SIML Insulation medium supervision liquid SLTC Tap changer supervision SOPM Supervision of operating mechanism SPDC M...

Страница 775: ...Earth fault neutralizer Petersen coil YLTC Tap changer YPSH Power shunt YPTR Power transformer Z LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN Auxiliary network ZBAT Battery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRES Resistor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arresto...

Страница 776: ...C 30 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin C 7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C C ...

Страница 777: ...nteroperability table Interoperability means that any required applica tion data in the device which can be coded into an IEC 60870 5 103 data type can be mapped into the IEC 60870 5 103 address space This data is recognized by any IEC 60870 5 103 master D 1 2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND The general formula for the transmitted value is Xt a X b where X is the measurand a is...

Страница 778: ...N LAYER Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 least significant octet first as defined in 4 10 of IEC 60870 5 4 is used exclusively in this companion stan dard Common address of ASDU One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU identical with station address More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction INF Semantics...

Страница 779: ...e sequence supervision 36 Trip circuit supervision 37 I back up operation 38 VT fuse failure 39 Teleprotection disturbed 46 Group warning 47 Group alarm Earth fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 48 Earth fault L1 49 Earth fault L2 50 Earth fault L3 51 Earth fault forward meaning line 52 Earth fault reverse meaning busbar Fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 64 Star...

Страница 780: ...rip IN Auto reclosure indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 128 CB on by AR 129 CB on by long time AR 130 AR blocked Measurands in monitor direction INF Semantics 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I V 146 Measurands I V P Q 147 Measurands IN VEN 148 Measurands IL123 VL123 P Q f Generic functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or att...

Страница 781: ...c 2 25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4 Generic functions in control direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group 243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value or attribute of a single entry 245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry 249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write en...

Страница 782: ... 6 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 103 APPENDIX D D Voltage L3 E Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage L1 L2 MEASURAND MAX MVAL TIMES RATED VALUE 1 2 OR 2 4 ...

Страница 783: ...rchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recomme...

Страница 784: ... indicate the following used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time ...

Страница 785: ...vents of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_N...

Страница 786: ...Call directory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M...

Страница 787: ..._RC_NA_1 48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RE...

Страница 788: ...B_1 112 P_ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION...

Страница 789: ...ing point number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in t...

Страница 790: ...sequences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETE...

Страница 791: ...ernet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected E 1 2 POINTS LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 da...

Страница 792: ...E 10 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin E 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX E E ...

Страница 793: ...ted in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Dead...

Страница 794: ... Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Of...

Страница 795: ...r Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Coun...

Страница 796: ... resp 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 in...

Страница 797: ...nt Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or...

Страница 798: ...9 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1...

Страница 799: ... 26 close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 0...

Страница 800: ...rformed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2...

Страница 801: ...irtual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 V...

Страница 802: ... freeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes suppor...

Страница 803: ...alog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be s...

Страница 804: ...F 12 D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin F 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX F F ...

Страница 805: ... user Tester with an Administrator role Tester User Password testpw GE PDC USER Role Administrator 4 In the clients conf file in the Path_to_Radius etc raddb folder add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS client where the client IP address is 10 0 0 2 the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the shared secret specified here is also configured on the UR device for successful authentication and ...

Страница 806: ...he IP address and ports for the RADIUS server Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910 Update the RADIUS shared secret as specified in the clients conf file 9 Verify operation Log in to the UR software as follows In the login window select Server as the Authentication Type enter the user name entered for example user name Tester and password testpw Check that the RADIUS server log file ...

Страница 807: ...4 3 1x 18 November 2002 URD 017 1601 0089 C5 3 0x 11 February 2003 URD 020 1601 0089 C6 3 1x 11 February 2003 URD 021 1601 0089 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URD 023 1601 0089 D2 3 2x 02 June 2003 URX 084 1601 0089 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 URX 080 1601 0089 E2 3 3x 29 May 2003 URX 083 1601 0089 F1 3 4x 10 December 2003 URX 111 1601 0089 F2 3 4x 09 February 2004 URX 115 1601 0089 F3 3 4x 27 February 2004 URX...

Страница 808: ...23 Add Added Syslog Format section 5 31 5 31 Add Added Far End Fault Indication FEFI section B B Update Updated Modbus memory map and F codes H 8 H 8 Update Updated product warranty from 24 months to 10 years Table H 3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION AA1 Sheet 1 of 2 PAGE Z1 PAGE AA1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Add Added content for IEC 60870 5 103 throughout document 2 2 Update Updated order codes 2...

Страница 809: ...ote Devices ID of Device for Receiving GSSE GOOSE Messages meaning the Settings Input Outputs Remote Devices settings Table H 5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION Y3 PAGE Y2 PAGE Y3 CHANGE DESCRIPTION xi Add Added battery disposal information as chapter 0 5 242 5 242 Update Updated Figure 5 135 Trip Output Scheme Logic Sheet 1 of 2 Table H 6 MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION Y2 PAGE Y1 PAGE...

Страница 810: ...Update Updated PMU main menu to add aggregator and control block menu items 5 5 91 Add Added UR Synchrophasor Implementation of IEC61850 90 5 to the PMU software option description 5 91 5 91 Update Updated Figure Complete Synchrophasor Implementation 5 5 92 Add Added Figure N60 Support For Four Logical Device PMU 5 92 5 92 Update Updated Table Implementation By Model Number 5 5 93 Add Added Figure...

Страница 811: ...tatus 7 7 1 Add Added Security command to the Commands main menu 7 7 3 Add Added Reboot Relay command and description to the Relay Maintenance menu items 7 7 Add Added Security menu and submenu commands and descriptions to the Command menu 7 7 Add Added to Minor self test error message Bad PTP Signal 8 8 4 Add Added new section for CyberSentry software option with overview and security menu subsec...

Страница 812: ...tector FDH Fault Detector high set FDL Fault Detector low set FLA Full Load Current FO Fiber Optic FREQ Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying FTP File Transfer Protocol FxE FlexElement FWD Forward G Generator GE General Electric GND Ground GNTR Generator GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HARM Harmonic Harmonics HCT High Current Time HGF High Impedance Grou...

Страница 813: ...mote Terminal Unit RX Rx Receive Receiver s second S Sensitive SAT CT Saturation SBO Select Before Operate SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC Secondary SEL Select Selector Selection SENS Sensitive SEQ Sequence SIR Source Impedance Ratio SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SRC Source SSB Single Side Band SSEL Session Selector STATS Statistics SUPN Supervision SUPV Supervise Supervisio...

Страница 814: ... of 1 October 2013 GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Digital Energy Terms and Conditions at https www gedigitalenergy com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Страница 815: ...L 3 11 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING 6 18 AWG WIRE SIZE 3 10 3 27 3 30 3 32 B BANKS 5 6 5 99 5 100 BATTERY disposal 10 5 failure 7 8 replace 10 3 BATTERY FAILURE 7 8 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS F 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 3 BLOCK SETTING 5 5 BLOCKING SCHEME application of settings 9 8 FlexLogic operands 5 146 logic 5 338 settings 5 335 5 336 BLOCKING1 SCHEME settings 5 339 BREAKER ARCING CUR...

Страница 816: ...OUTPUTS actual values 6 5 FlexLogic operands 5 152 5 153 Modbus registers B 14 B 21 B 80 settings 5 349 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 255 CONTROL POWER description 3 10 specifications 2 26 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands 5 144 Modbus registers B 74 settings 5 78 specifications 2 23 COUNTERS actual values 6 7 settings 5 295 CRC ALARM 5 94 CRC 16 ALGORITHM B 2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY 2 26 3 9 CSA APPROVA...

Страница 817: ...nts 8 7 characteristics 8 2 ground 2 18 5 181 mho characteristic 5 173 5 175 Modbus registers B 52 phase 2 17 5 171 quad characteristic 5 174 5 175 5 176 5 183 settings 5 170 stepped distance 9 2 DISTURBANCE DETECTOR FlexLogic operands 5 151 internal 5 102 DNA 1 BIT PAIR 5 354 DNP COMMUNICATIONS binary counters F 10 binary input points F 8 binary output points F 9 control relay output blocks F 9 d...

Страница 818: ...itor 5 160 error messages 7 7 evaluation 5 155 example 5 142 5 156 example equation 5 258 gate characteristics 5 154 locking equation entries 4 9 locking to a serial number 4 10 Modbus registers B 36 operands 5 143 5 144 operators 5 155 rules 5 155 security 4 9 specifications 2 22 timers 5 160 worksheet 5 157 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR 5 160 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS Modbus registers B 37 settings 5 161 FOR...

Страница 819: ...COMMUNICATIONS 3 33 3 35 3 38 IEEE CURVES 5 201 IN SERVICE INDICATOR 1 19 7 7 INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR 7 7 INPUTS AC current 2 24 5 99 AC voltage 2 25 5 100 contact inputs 2 25 5 346 5 370 dcmA inputs 2 25 3 19 direct inputs 2 25 IRIG B 2 25 3 23 remote inputs 2 25 5 352 5 353 5 354 RTD inputs 2 25 3 19 virtual 5 348 INSPECTION CHECKLIST 1 2 INSTALLATION communications 3 21 CT inputs 3 10 3 11 ...

Страница 820: ...uts 3 25 insertion 10 1 order codes 2 14 power supply 3 9 transducer I O 3 19 VT 3 11 withdrawal 10 1 MONITORING ELEMENTS 5 297 MOUNTING 3 1 3 2 N NAMEPLATE 1 2 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers B 48 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT characteristics 5 230 FlexLogic operands 5 147 logic 5 231 settings 5 228 5 231 specifications 2 19 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC FlexLogic operands 5...

Страница 821: ...ANEL CUTOUT 3 1 3 2 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL actual values 6 11 explained 5 31 settings 5 30 specifications 2 27 PARITY 5 27 PASSWORD SECURITY FlexLogic operands 5 153 PASSWORDS changing 4 30 for settings templates 4 6 lost password 5 8 Modbus registers B 19 B 29 overview 1 19 reset to factory defaults 5 8 security 2 4 settings 2 3 PC SOFTWARE see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP PERMISSIVE FUNCTI...

Страница 822: ...ctual values 6 11 explained 5 31 settings 5 30 specifications 2 27 PU QUANTITY 5 4 PUSHBUTTONS USER PROGRAMMABLE see USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS PUTT application of settings 9 6 FlexLogic operands 5 150 logic 5 324 Modbus registers B 44 settings 5 323 Q QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 5 174 5 175 5 176 5 183 8 5 8 6 R REACTIVE POWER 2 24 6 18 REAL POWER 2 24 6 18 REAL TIME CLOCK Modbus registers B ...

Страница 823: ...ES description 5 5 metering 6 16 settings 5 102 SIGNAL TYPES 1 3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 2 1 2 2 SITE LIST CREATING 4 1 SNTP PROTOCOL accuracy 2 27 error messages 7 9 Modbus registers B 31 settings 5 67 SOFTWARE installation 1 5 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE 1 4 SOFTWARE PC see entry for EnerVista UR Setup SOURCE FREQUENCY 6 19 SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES 5 242 SOURCES description...

Страница 824: ...erands 5 152 logic 5 269 Modbus registers B 42 settings 5 265 specifications 2 21 TROUBLE INDICATOR 1 19 7 6 U UL APPROVAL 2 30 UNABLE TO PUT RELAY IN FLASH MODE 4 2 UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS commands 5 26 resetting 7 2 UNBLOCKING SCHEME FlexLogic operands 5 146 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 341 UNDERFREQUENCY FlexLogic operands 5 152 logic 5 271 settings 5 271 specifications 2 20 UNDERVOLTAGE auxili...

Страница 825: ...FUSE FAILURE logic 5 310 Modbus registers B 59 settings 5 309 VT INPUTS 3 11 5 6 5 100 VT WIRING 3 11 VTFF FlexLogic operands 5 151 see VT FUSE FAILURE W WARNINGS 1 1 WARRANTY H 8 WATT HOURS 2 24 6 19 WATTMETRIC ZERO SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL actual values 6 22 FlexLogic operands 5 152 Modbus registers B 66 settings 5 219 specifications 2 20 WEB SERVER PROTOCOL 5 56 WEBSITE 1 2 WIRE SIZE CT VT 3 10 G 7...

Страница 826: ...xii D60 Line Distance Protection System GE Multilin INDEX ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для D60

Panasonic FP-I4C User Manual preview
FP-I4C
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 31
Panasonic EYFR03 Training Manual preview
EYFR03
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 31
Panasonic UJ20 Series How To Use Manual preview
UJ20 Series
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 26
NAiS FP Series Hardware Manual preview
FP Series
Бренд: NAiS Страницы: 199
Panasonic CZ-ANC2 Instruction Manual preview
CZ-ANC2
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 38
Panasonic CZ-64ESMC3 Operating Instructions Manual preview
CZ-64ESMC3
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 64
Panasonic CZ-256ESMC3 Quick Reference preview
CZ-256ESMC3
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 36
Panasonic CZ-256ESMC3 Technical Data Manual preview
CZ-256ESMC3
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 179
Panasonic AW-RP60G Operating Manual preview
AW-RP60G
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 23
Panasonic PAN9026 Quick Start Manual preview
PAN9026
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 30
Panasonic PAN4620 Quick Start Manual preview
PAN4620
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 26
Panasonic PAN1326C Design Manual preview
PAN1326C
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 12
Panasonic SF4D Series Quick Instruction Manual preview
SF4D Series
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 4
Panasonic PAN1740A Integration Manual preview
PAN1740A
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 44
Panasonic WH-ADC0309H3E5 Quick Menu Manual preview
WH-ADC0309H3E5
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 20
Panasonic INDUSTRY PAN9028 Quick Start Manual preview
INDUSTRY PAN9028
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 34
Panasonic CZ-RTC5B Installation Instructions Manual preview
CZ-RTC5B
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 15
Panasonic CZ-RTC3 Operating Instructions Manual preview
CZ-RTC3
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 42

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды